Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 521

GFZ-62445E B-62445E

GE Fanuc CNC
Series 16/160/18/180-Model B
Maintenance Manual

Presented By: CNC Center
For Product Needs Please Visit:
http://www.cnccenter.com/
OR Email:
sales@cnccenter.com
OR Call:
1-800-963-3513
GE Fanuc CNC Manuals www.cnccenter.com

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 16 / 160 / 18 / 180 – Model B

Maintenance Manual

GFZ-62445E/03 January 1995

B–62445E/03 PREFACE

PREFACE

Description of 1.CRT/MDI display and operation
this manual This chapter covers those items, displayed on the CRT, that are related to
maintenance. A list of all supported operations is also provided at the end
of this chapter.
2.Hardware
This chapter covers hardware–related items, including the hardware
configuration, connection, and NC status indicated on printed circuit
boards. A list of all units is also provided as well as an explanation of how
to replace each unit.
3.Data input/output
This chapter describes the input/output of data, including programs,
parameters, and tool compensation data, aswell as the input/output
procedures for conversational data.
4.Interface between the NC and PMC
This chapter describes the PMC specifications, the system configuration,
and the signals used by the PMC.
5.Digital servo
This chapter describes the servo tuning screen and how to adjust the
reference position return position.
6.and 7. AC spindles
These chapters describe the spindle amplifier checkpoints, as well as the
spindle tuning screen.
8.Trouble shooting
This chapter describes the procedures to be followed in the event of
certain problems occurring, for example, if the power cannot be turned on
or if manual operation cannot be performed. Countermeasures to be
applied in the event of alarms being output are also described.
9.and 10. Spindle trouble shooting
These chapters explain the alarms related to spindles, as well as the
corresponding countermeasures to be applied.
APPENDIX
The appendix consists of a list of all alarms, as well as a list of
maintenance parts. The I/O Unit–MODEL A is also described.
This manual does not provide a parameter list. If necessary, refer to the
separate PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS (B–61810E) .
This manual describes all optional functions. Refer to the manual
provided by the machine tool builder for details of any options with which
the installed machine tool is provided.

PREFACE B–62445E/03

This manual can be used with the following models. The abbreviated
names may be used.
Applicable models Pruduct name Abbreviation

FANUC Series 16–TB 16–TB T series or
T series (two–path
FANUC Series 160–TB 160–TB control)*1

FANUC Series 16–MB 16–MB M series or M se-
ries (two–path
FANUC Series 160–MB 160–MB control)*1

om
FANUC Series 18–TB 18–TB T series or
T series (two–path
FANUC Series 180–TB 180–TB control)*1

FANUC Series 18–MB 18–MB
M series

r.c
FANUC Series 180–MB 180–MB

Note

e
Some function described in this manual may not be applied
to some products.
nt
For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS manual
(B–62442E)
ce
Related manuals The table below lists manuals related to MODEL B of Series 16, Series
18, Series 160 and Series 180.
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).
nc

Table 1 Manuals Related
Manual name Specification
number
.c

DESCRIPTIONS B–62442E

CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B–62443E
w

CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B–62443E–1

OPERATOR’S MANUAL FOR LATHE B–62444E
w

OPERATOR’S MANUAL FOR MACHINING B–62454E

MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–62445E *
w

PARAMETER MANUAL B–62450E

PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Macro Compiler / Macro Execu- B–61803E–1
ter)

FAPT MACRO COMPILER PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–66102E

FANUC Super CAP T OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62444E–1

FANUC Super CAP M OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62154E

FANUC Super CAP M PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–62153E

B–62445E/03 PREFACE

Table 1 Manuals Related
Manual name Specification
number
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNC- B–61804E–1
TION I FOR LATHE (Series 18–TB) OPERATOR’S MANUAL

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNC- B–61804E–2
TION II FOR LATHE (Series 15–MODEL B, Series–16 CAP II)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL

om
For specifications and maintenance of FANUC CONTROL MOTOR α
series, refer to the following manuals :
Document
Document name Major contents Major usage
number

 Specification

r.c
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series  Characteristics
B–65142E
DESCRIPTIONS  External dimensions
 Connections  Selection of motor

e
 Specification  Connection of motor

FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series  Characteristics
DESCRIPTIONS nt B–65152E
 External dimensions
 Connections

 Specifications and
ce
functions  Selection of
FANUC CONTROL MOTOR AMPLIFIER  Installation amplifier
B–65162E
α series DESCRIPTIONS  External dimensions and  Connection of
maintenance area amplifier
nc

 Connections

 Start up the system
 Start up procedure (Hardware)
FANUC CONTROL MOTOR α series
 Troubleshooting  Troubleshooting
.c

B–65165E
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
 Maintenance of motor  Maintenance of
motor
w

 Initial setting
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series
B–65150E  Setting parameters
PARAMETER MANUAL  Start up the system
 Description of parameters
w

(Software)
 Initial setting  Turning the system
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series (Parameters)
B–65160E  Setting parameters
w

PARAMETER MANUAL
 Description of parameters

B–62445E/03 Table of Contents
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.1 Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 SCREEN DISPLAYED IMMEDIATELY AFTER POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.2.1 Slot Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.2.2 Setting Module Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.2.3 Configuration Display of Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.3.1 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

om
1.3.2 Configuration of PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.3.3 Software Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.3.4 Module Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.4 ALARM HISTORY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

r.c
1.4.2 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.4.3 Clearing Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.4.4 Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.5 EXTERNAL OPERATOR MESSAGES RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5.1 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

e
1.5.2 Deletion of External Operator Messages Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5.3 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

1.6
1.5.4 nt
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.6.1 Parameter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29

30
ce
1.6.2 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.6.3 Setting the Input Signal or Output Signal to be Recorded in the Operation History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.6.4 Inputting and Outputting the Operation History Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.6.5 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
nc

1.7 HELP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1.7.2 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1.8 DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
.c

1.8.1 Displaying Diagnostic Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
1.8.2 Contents Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
1.9 NC STATE DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
w

1.10 WAVE FORM DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
1.10.1 Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
1.10.2 Waveform Diagnostic Parameter Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
w

1.10.3 Graphic of Wave Diagnosis Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
1.10.4 Data Sampling for Storage Type Waveform Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
1.10.5 Outputting Waveform Diagnosis Data (Storage Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
w

1.11 OPERATING MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
1.11.1 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
1.12 LIST OF OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
1.13 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN AN OPTION IS CHANGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
1.14 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN SYSTEM SOFTWARE IS REPLACED
(SYSTEM LABEL CHECK ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

2. HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2.1 STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

c–1

TABLE OF CONTENTS B–62445E/03

2.2 GENERAL OF HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
2.2.1 Series 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
2.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
2.3.1 16–TB/MB, 160–TB/MB (MAIN–A SPEC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
2.3.2 16–TB/MB, 160–TB/MB, 18–TB/MB, 180–TB/MB (MAIN–B SPEC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
2.3.3 18–TB/MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
2.4 INTER–MACHINE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2.4.1 CRT/MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2.4.2 Reader/Puncher Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
2.4.3 Manual Pulse Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

om
2.4.4 I/O LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
2.4.5 Servo Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
2.4.6 Connections by Type of Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2.4.7 Combining Serial Spindle and Analog Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
2.4.8 Connection to α serial Spindle Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

r.c
2.4.9 Connection to Serial Spindle Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
2.4.10 Connection to Analog Spindle Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
2.4.11 Remote Buffer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
2.4.12 High–speed DI Signal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

e
2.4.13 Analog Signal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
2.4.14 Environmental Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

2.5
2.4.15
2.4.16
nt
Power Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Action Against Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
LED DISPLAY AND MODULE CONFIGURATION OF PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
ce
2.5.1 Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
2.5.2 Main CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
2.5.3 Option 1 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
2.5.4 Option 2 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
nc

2.5.5 Option 3 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
2.5.6 Loader Control Boad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
2.5.7 I/O Card (Sink Type Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
2.5.8 I/O Card (Source Type Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
.c

2.5.9 I/O Cards with Power Supply (Power C) (Sink Type Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2.5.10 I/O Cards with Power Supply (Power C) (Source Type Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
2.5.11 Background Graphic Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
w

2.6 LIST OF THE PCBS AND UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2.6.1 Control Unit Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2.6.2 Power Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
w

2.6.3 Control Unit P.C.B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
2.6.4 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
2.6.5 CRT/MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
w

2.7 HOW TO REPLACE THE MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2.7.1 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2.7.2 Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2.8 HOW TO REPLACE THE BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
2.8.1 Replace the Battery for Memory Back Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
2.8.2 Replacing Batteries for Separate Absolute Pulse Coder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
2.9 HOW TO REPLACE FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
2.10 FUSE REPLACEMENT IN POWER SUPPLY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
2.11 MAINTENANCE OF HEAT PIPE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

c–2

B–62445E/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.12 HOW TO REPLACE THE COLOR LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
2.13 REPLACING THE LCD FUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
2.14 REPLACING THE LCD BAKLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
3.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
3.2 INPUTTING/ OUTPUTTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
3.2.1 Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
3.2.2 Outputting CNC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

om
3.2.3 Outputting PMC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
3.2.4 Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
3.2.5 Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
3.2.6 Outputting Tool Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
3.2.7 Outputting Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

r.c
3.2.8 Inputting CNC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
3.2.9 Inputting PMC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
3.2.10 Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
3.2.11 Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
3.2.12 Inputting Tool Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

e
3.2.13 Inputting Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
3.3 INPUT/OUTPUT SUPER CAP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
nt
Input/Output of Conversational Data in a Lump(Super CAP M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input and Output of Each File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output of CAP Data (Super CAP T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
195
197
197
ce
3.3.4 Inputting CAP Data (Super CAP T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
3.4 INPUTTING/OUTPUTT ING CAP–II DATA(16–T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
3.5 DUMP/RESTORE OF CAP–II DATA (16 – T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
3.5.1 Kind of Data in Sub Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
nc

3.5.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
3.6 CLEARING CAP–II DATA (16 – T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
3.6.1 Deleting File Name and Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
3.6.2 Clearing CAP–II Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
.c

4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
w

4.1 GENERAL OF INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
4.2 SPECIFICATION OF PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
4.2.1 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
w

4.2.2 Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
4.2.3 Built–in Debug Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
w

4.2.4 System Reserve Area of Internal Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
4.2.5 Execution Period of PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
4.3 PMC SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
4.3.1 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
4.3.2 PMCLAD Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4.3.3 PMCDGN Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4.3.4 Memory Display (M.SRCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
4.3.5 PMCRAM Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.4 LIST OF SIGNALS BY EACH MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
4.5 SIGNAL AND SYMBOL CORRESPONDENCE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

c–3

TABLE OF CONTENTS B–62445E/03

5. DIGITAL SERVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
5.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
5.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
5.2.1 Parameter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
5.2.2 Displaying Servo Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
5.3 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
5.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
5.4 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
5.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

om
5.4.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
5.4.3 Associated Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
6.1 GENERAL OF SPINDLE CONTROL (SERIAL* INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

r.c
6.1.1 Method A of Gear Change for Machining Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
6.1.2 Method B of Gear Change for Machining Center(PRM 3705#2=1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
6.1.3 For Lathe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
6.2 TABLE OF TEST POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

e
6.2.1 Printed Circuit Board (A16B–2201–0440) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
6.2.2 Signal Waveform At Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
nt
CONFIRMING POWER SUPPLY (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
ce
6.4 SPINDLE SETTING AND TUNING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
6.4.1 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
6.4.2 Spindle Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
6.4.3 Spindle Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
nc

6.4.4 Spindle Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
6.4.5 Correspondence Between Operation Mode and Parameters on Spindle Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
6.5 AUTOMATIC SETTING OF STANDARD PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
.c

7. AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
7.1 GENERAL OF SPINDLE CONTROL (ANALOG INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
w

7.1.1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
7.1.2 Calculation of S Analog Voltage and Associated Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
7.1.3 Tuning S Analog Voltage (D/A Converter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
w

7.2 TABLE OF TEST POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
7.2.1 Model 1S to 3S (Amp. Specification : A06B–6059–H00x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
7.2.2 Models 6S to 26S (Amp. specification: A06B–6059–H2xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
w

7.2.3 Test Points Signal Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
7.3 SETTING PARAMETERS (DIGITAL AC SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
7.4 SETTING STANDARD PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
7.5 LIST OF PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
7.6 TUNING AFTER REPLACING PCB (S SERIES AC SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

8. TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
8.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
8.1.1 Investigating the Conditions under which Failure Occurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

c–4

B–62445E/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS

8.2 POWER CANNOT BE TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
8.3 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED . . . . . . . . 301
8.4 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
8.5 HANDLE OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
8.6 AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
8.7 CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
8.8 NOTHING IS DISPLAYED ON CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
8.9 ALARM 85 TO 87 (READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
8.10 REFERENCE POSITION DEVIATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

om
8.11 ALARM 90 (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
8.12 ALARM 300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE POSITION RETURN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
8.13 ALARM 301 TO 305 (ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER IS FAULTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
8.14 ALARM 306 TO 308 (ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER BATTERY IS LOW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
8.15 ALARM 350 (SERIAL PULSE CODER IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

r.c
8.16 ALARM 351 (SERIAL PULSE CODER COMMUNICATION IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
8.17 ALARM 400 (OVERLOAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
8.18 ALARM 401 (*DRDY SIGNAL TURNED OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
8.19 ALARM 404 AND 405 (*DRDY SIGNAL TURNED ON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

e
8.20 ALARM 410 (EXCESSIVE POSITION ERROR AMOUNT DURING STOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
8.21 ALRAM 411 (EXECESSIVE POSITION ERROR DURING MOVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
8.22
8.23
8.24
nt
ALARM 414 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALRAM 416 (DISCONNECTION ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARM 417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
353
365
366
ce
8.25 ALARM 700 (OVERHEAT AT CONTROL SIDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
8.26 ALARM 704 (SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
8.27 ALARM 749 (SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
8.28 ALARM 750 (SPINDLE SERIAL LINK CANNOT BE STARTED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
nc

8.29 ALARM 751,761 (SPINDLE ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
8.30 ALARM 900 (ROM PARITY ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
8.31 ALARM 910 TO 915 (SRAM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
8.32 ALARM 916 (DRAM PARITY ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
.c

8.33 ALARM 920 TO 923 (WATCH DOG OR RAM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
8.34 ALARM 924 (SERVO MODULE MOUNTING ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
w

8.35 ALARM 930 (CPU ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
8.36 ALARM 950 (PMC SYSTEM ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
8.37 ALARM 951 (PMC–RCWATCH DOG ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
w

8.38 ALARM 970 (NMI ALARM IN PMC CONTROL MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
8.39 ALARM 971 (NMI ALARM IN SLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
8.40 ALARM 972 (NMI ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
w

8.41 ALARM 973 (NMI ALARM BY UNKNOWN CAUSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

9. TROUBLESHOOTING (SERIAL INTERFACE SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
9.1 LIST OF SERIAL INTERFACE SPINDLE AMPLIFIER ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
9.2 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR EACH ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

10. TROUBLESHOOTING (ANALOG INTERFACE SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
10.1 AL–01 (MOTOR OVERHEAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

c–5

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 NO ROTATION OR INCORRECT SPEED . . . . 417 10. . . . .8 Load Basic System Function . . . . . . .10 CONFIRMATION OF TRANSISTOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 D. . . 416 10. . . . . . . . 501 D. . . . . . . . . . . .7 AL–12 (DC LINK EXCESSIVE CURRENT) . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 D. . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 w D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 AL–06. . . . . . . . . .3 System Data Delete Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM LIST .8 ABNORMAL SOUND AND VIBRATION DURING ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 System Data Check Screen . . . .3 SPINDLE ALARMS (SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . 468 nc C. . . . 421 om APPENDIXES A. . . . . . . . 432 ce B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 w D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 B. . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MAINTENANCE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOTATION OF MDI KEYS . . . . . 493 D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 r. . . . . . . . . . .7 Memory Card Format Function . 489 w D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS . . . . . . . . . 471 C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 D. . . . . . . . . . . .1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . 502 D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .c A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 System Files and User Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O UNIT MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 REMOVING A PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD . . . . . 463 B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BOOT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PROCEDURE .5 SRAM Data Backup Screen . . . . . . . .3 LED INDICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Boot Slot Configuration Screen . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . .2 LIST OF ALARMS (PMC) . . . . .6 AL–11 (DC LINK EXCESSIVE VOLTAGE) . . . 506 c–6 . . . . . . . . . . 414 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Starting the Boot System . . . . . . . . .1 System Data Loading Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 SPINDLE ALARMS (ANALOG INTERFACE) (S SEIRES AC SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Memory Card File Delete Screen . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . 426 A. . . . 427 e A. . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 AL–02 (EXCESSIVE DEVIATION OF SPEED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 System Data Save Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 E. . . . .5 AL–10 (LOW INPUT VOLTAGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE OF CONTENTS B–62445E/03 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 A. . . . . . . . . . . . . .c D. . 07 (OVER SPEED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 AL–09 (UNIT OVERHEAT / 6S TO 26S ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . 431 LIST OF ALARM CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 nt B. . . .

.12 LIST OF OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . .c 1. . .c WHEN SYSTEM SOFTWARE IS REPLACED (SYSTEM LABEL CHECK ERROR) . . . . . . . .2 SCREEN DISPLAYED IMMEDIATELY AFTER POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . 86 1. . . . 2 1. . . . . . . .11 OPERATING MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . 27 1. . . .10 WAVE FORM DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 NC STATE DISPLAY . . . . . . .8 DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN AN OPTION IS CHANGED . . . .7 HELP FUNCTION . 22 1. . 28 e 1. 51 1. . . 69 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN . . .B–62445E/03 1. . . . . 24 r. . . . . . . . . . . .14 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED . . . . . . . . The screens used for maintenance are respectively displayed.6 OPERATION HISTORY . . . . . . . om 1. . . . .1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 w w w 1 . . . 54 1. . . . . . . . . . DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI 1 DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI This chapter describes how to display various screens by the function keys. . . . . 30 nt 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 ce 1. . . . .5 EXTERNAL OPERATOR MESSAGES RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 ALARM HISTORY SCREEN . . 82 nc 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. The symbols in the following figures mean as shown below : om : Indicates screens : Indicates a screen that can be displayed by pressing a function key(*1)   : Indicates a soft key(*2) r. nc *3 In some cases. the continuous menu key is omitted when the 14″ CRT display or 8. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 1. *2 Some soft keys are not displayed depending on the option configuration.1. Soft keys are also used for actual operations.4″/9.   : Indicates a soft key displayed in green (or highlighted).c w w w 2 .1 To display a more detailed screen.c   : Indicates input from the MDI panel.1 Operations and soft key display staturs for each function key are described below: FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS 1. press a function key followed by a soft Soft Keys key.1. e : Indicates the continuous menu key (rightmost soft key)(*3). The following illustrates how soft key displays are changed by pressing each function key. nt ce *1 Press function keys to switch between screens that are used frequently.5″/LCD is used.

c [REL] [(OPRT)] (Axis or numeral) [PRESET] [ORIGIN] [ALLEXE] [Axis name] [EXEC] [PTSPRE] [EXEC] e [RUNPRE] [EXEC] Current position display [ALL] [(OPRT)] nt (Axis or numeral) [PRESET] ce [ORIGIN] [ALLEXE] [Axis name] [EXEC] [PTSPRE] [EXEC] nc [RUNPRE] [EXEC] Handle interruption .B–62445E/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI POSITION SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key POS POS Absolute coordinate display om [ABS] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC] [RUNPRE] [EXEC] Relative coordinate display r.c [HNDL] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC] [RUNPRE] [EXEC] w w Monitor screen [MONI] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC] w [RUNPRE] [EXEC] 3 .

c [CURRNT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" w Next block display screen [NEXT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" w w Program restart display screen [RSTR] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" (2)(Continued on the next page) 4 .c [Q TYPE] [F SRH] [CAN] [EXEC] e Program check display screen [CHECK] [ABS] [REL] nt [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] [O number] [N number] [REWIND] See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" [O SRH] [N SRH] ce [P TYPE] [Q TYPE] nc [F SRH] [CAN] [EXEC] Current block display screen . DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG in the MEM mode 1/2 PROG Program display screen See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" om [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] [O number] [O SRH] (1) [N number] [N SRH] [REWIND] [P TYPE] r.1.

B–62445E/03 1.SDL] [PRGRM] Return to (1) (Program display) File directory display screen [DIR] [(OPRT)] [SELECT] [File No.c (Schedule data) [INPUT] e nt ce nc .c w w w 5 . ] [F SET] [EXEC] om Schedule operation display screen [SCHDUL] [(OPRT)] [CLEAR] [CAN] [EXEC] r. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI 2/2 (2) [FL.

c [ – BTTM] [CHANGE] (Address) [BEFORE] (Address) [AFTER] [SKIP] w [1–EXEC] [EXEC] w (1)(Continued on the next page) w 6 .) [STOP] [CAN] e (O number) [EXEC] [PUNCH] [STOP] nt [DELETE] [CAN] (O number) [CAN] (N number) [EXEC] [EXEC] ce [EX–EDT] [COPY] [CRSR – ] (O number) [EXEC] [ – CRSR] [ – BTTM] [ALL] [MOVE] [CRSR∼] (O number) [EXEC] nc [ – CRSR] [ – BTTM] [ALL] [MERGE] [ – CRSR] (O number) [EXEC] .1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG in the EDIT mode 1/2 PROG Program display om [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" (O number) [O SRH] (Address) [SRH↓] (Address) [SRH↑] [REWIND] r.c [F SRH] [CAN] (N number) [EXEC] [READ] [CHAIN] (The cursor moves to the end of a program.

c Floppy directory display [FLOPPY] [PRGRM] Return to the program [DIR] [(OPRT)] [F SRH] (Numeral) [F SET] w [CAN] [EXEC] [READ] (Numeral) [F SET] w (Numeral) [O SET] [STOP] [CAN] w [EXEC] [PUNCH] (Numeral) [F SET] (Numeral) [O SET] [STOP] [CAN] [EXEC] [DELETE] (Numeral) [F SET] [CAN] [EXEC] 7 .R] nt Graphic Conversational Programming (M series) [INPUT] ce [C.A.] [PRGRM] Return to the program [G.] [PRGRM] Return to the program [G. [CHAMF] the standard screen appears.P.MENU] (G number) [BLOCK] (Data) [LINE] e When a G number is omitted. nc [(OPRT)] [INPUT] .MENU] (G number) [BLOCK] (Data) [INPUT] INSERT When a G number is omitted.A.P. the standard screen appears. [CNR.B–62445E/03 1.c Graphic Conversational Programming (T series) [C. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI 2/2 (1) Program directory display [LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" (O number) [O SRH] Return to the program [READ] [CHAIN] [STOP] om [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] [PUNCH] [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] r.

c [RSTR] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" w w w 8 .c [START] [CAN] [EXEC] (Address) [SRH↓] (Address) [SRH↑] [REWIND] e Current block display screen [CURRNT] [(OPRT)] nt [BG–EDT] See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" ce Next block display screen [NEXT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" nc Program restart display screen .1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG in the MDI mode PROG Program display om [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" Program input screen [MDI] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" r.

c Next block display screen [NEXT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See "When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" e Program restart display screen [RSTR] [(OPRT)] nt [BG–EDT] See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" ce nc . DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG in the HNDL.B–62445E/03 1. or REF mode PROG Program display om [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" Current block display screen [CURRNT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" r.c w w w 9 . JOG.

c w w w 10 .c (Address) [SRH↓] (Address) [SRH↑] [REWIND] e Program directory display [LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See "When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" nt (O number) [O SRH] Return to the program ce nc . DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG in the TJOG or THDL mode PROG Program display [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See "When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" om Program input screen [MDI] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See "When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" (O number) [O SRH] Return to the program r.1.

c [F SRH] [CAN] (N number) [EXEC] [READ] [CHAIN] (The cursor moves to the end of a program.c [ – BTTM] [CHANGE] (Address) [BEFORE] (Address) [AFTER] [SKIP] w [1–EXEC] [EXEC] w (1)(Continued on the next page) w 11 . DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI PROG PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key (When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed in all modes) 1/2 PROG Program display om [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–END] (O number) [O SRH] (Address) [SRH↓] (Address) [SRH↑] [REWIND] r.B–62445E/03 1.) [STOP] [CAN] e (O number) [EXEC] [PUNCH] [STOP] nt [DELETE] [CAN] (O number) [CAN] (N number) [EXEC] [EXEC] ce [EX–EDT] [COPY] [CRSR – ] (O number) [EXEC] [ – CRSR] [ – BTTM] [ALL] [MOVE] [CRSR – ] (O number) [EXEC] nc [ – CRSR] [ – BTTM] [ALL] [MERGE] [ – CRSR] (O number) [EXEC] .

MENU] (G number) [BLOCK] (Data) [LINE] [CHAMF] screen appears.] [PRGRM] Return to the program e [G.P.A. the standard [CNR.R] [INPUT] ce Floppy directory display nc [FLOPPY] [PRGRM] Return to the program [DIR] [(OPRT)] [F SRH] (Numeral) [F SET] [CAN] [EXEC] . DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 2/2 (1) Program directory display [LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] (O number) [O SRH] Return to the program [READ] [CHAIN] om [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] [PUNCH] [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] r. nt When a G number is omitted.c [READ] (Numeral) [F SET] (Numeral) [O SET] [STOP] w [CAN] [EXEC] [PUNCH] (Numeral) [F SET] w (Numeral) [O SET] [STOP] [CAN] w [EXEC] [DELETE] (Numeral) [F SET] [CAN] [EXEC] 12 .c Graphic Conversational Programming [C.1.

C. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI Soft key transition triggered by the OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN (T series) function key OFFSET SETTING 1/2 OFFSET SETTING Tool offset screen om [OFFSET] [WEAR] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] [GEOM] (Axis name and numeral) [MEASUR] (Axis name) [INP.c [CLEAR] [ALL] [WEAR] [GEOM] [READ] [CAN] [EXEC] e [PUNCH] [CAN] [EXEC] Setting screen [SETING] [(OPRT)] nt (Number) [NO SRH] ce [ON:1] [OFF:0] (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Numeral) [INPUT] nc Work coordinate system setting screen [WORK] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] (Axis name and numeral) [MEASUR] .] (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Numeral) [INPUT] r.] w (Numeral) [INPUT] [PUNCH] [CAN] [EXEC] (1)(Continued on the next page) 13 .B–62445E/03 1.c (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Numeral) [INPUT] w Macro variables display screen w [MACRO] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] (Axis name) [INP.C.

] [+INPUT] [MEASUR] ce (Numeral) [INPUT] [CLEAR] [ALL] [WEAR] [GEOM] nc [READ] [CAN] [EXEC] [PUNCH] [CAN] [EXEC] .SHFT] [(OPRT)] (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Numeral) [INPUT] w w 14 .c Workpiece shift screen w [WK.c (Numeral) [INPUT] e Y axis tool offset screen [OFST. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 2/2 (1) Menu programming screen [MENU] [(OPRT)] (Number) [SELECT] Software operator’s panel screen [OPR] om Tool life management setting screen [TOOLLF] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] [CLEAR] [CAN] [EXEC] r.2] [WEAR] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] [GEOM] nt (Axis name and numeral) (Axis name) (Numeral) [INP.1.C.

C.c (Numeral) [INPUT] w [PUNCH] Menu programming screen w [MENU] [(OPRT)] (Number) [SELECT] w Software operator’s panel screen [OPR] Tool life management setting screen [TOOLLF] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] [CLEAR] [CAN] [EXEC] (Numeral) [INPUT] 15 .] .] (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Numeral) [INPUT] Setting screen r.C. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI Soft key transition triggered by the OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN (M series) function key OFFSET SETTING OFFSET SETTING Tool offset screen om [OFFSET] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] (Axis name) [INP.B–62445E/03 1.c [SETING] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] [ON:1] [OFF:0] (Numeral) [+INPUT] e (Numeral) [INPUT] [WORK] [(OPRT)] nt Work coordinate system setting screen (Number) (Numeral) [NO SRH] [+INPUT] ce (Numeral) [INPUT] nc Macro variables display screen [MACRO] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] (Axis name) [INP.

then press INPUTon the PRGRM screen Diagnosis screen [DGNOS] [(OPRT)] nt (Number) [NO SRH] ce PMC screen [PMC] [PMCLAD] [SEARCH] [TOP] nc [BOTTOM] [SRCH] [W–SRCH] [N–SRCH] .1.c [F–SRCH] [ADRESS]/[SYMBOL] w [TRIGER] [TRGON] [TRGOFF] [START] w [DUMP] [SEARCH] w [DPARA]/[NDPARA] [BYTE] [TRGSRC] [WORD] [INIT] [D. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 SYSTEM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key SYSTEM 1/3 SYSTEM Parameter screen [PARAM] (Number) [NO SRH] om [(OPRT)] [ON:1] [OFF:0] (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Numeral) [INPUT] r. enter a file [EXEC] e number.c [READ] [CAN] [EXEC] [PUNCH] [CAN] To enter a file number: Press N .WORD] [WINDOW] [DIVIDE] [CANCEL] [DELETE] [SELECT] [WIDTH] (1) (2) (3) (Continued on the next page) 16 .

) .DISP]/[TRCPRM] [EXEC] [M. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI (1) (2) (3) 2/3 [DUMP] [SEARCH] [BYTE] [WORD] [D.WORD] [DRARA]/[NDPARA] [PMCDGN] [TITLE] [STATUS] [SEARCH] [ALARM] om [TRACE] [T.SRH] [SEARCH] [INIT] [SETTING] [YES]/[MANUAL]/[ROM] [NO]/[AUTO]/[RAM] [STOP]/[RUN] nc [I/O] [EXEC] [CANCEL] (No.c PMC–RC [INIT] [T–SRCH] only [ADRESS]/[SYMBOL] [EXCHG] [SELECT] [TO] [EXEC] [CANCEL] [ADRESS]/[SYMBOL] e [PMCPRM] [TIMER] nt [COUNTR] [KEEPRL] [DATA] [G.CONT] [C.B–62445E/03 1.DATA] [G–SRCH] ce [NO.DATA] [G.c [SPEED] [INPUT] [INIT] [MDI]/[ROM] w w System configuration screen [SYSTEM] w (4) (Continued on the next page) 17 .SRCH] [SEARCH] [INPUT] [ANALYS] [SCOPE] [SGNPRM] With [DELETE] [START]/[STOP] r.

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03

(4) 3/3
Pitch error compensation screen

[PITCH] [(OPRT)] (No.) [NO SRH]
[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]

[READ] [CAN]

om
[EXEC]

[PUNCH] [CAN] To enter a file number: Press N , enter a file
[EXEC]
number, then press INPUT
on the PRGRM screen

r.c
Servo parameter screen

[SV.PRM] [SV.SET] [ON:1]
[(OPRT)]
[SV.TUN] [OFF:0]
(Numeral) [INPUT]

e
[TRACE]
[SV.TRC] [(OPRT)]
[TRNSF]

Spindle parameter screen
nt
ce
[SP.PRM] [SP.SET] [ON:1]
[(OPRT)]
[SP.TUN] [OFF:0]
[SP.MON] [INPUT]
nc

Waveform diagnosis screen
.c

[W.DGNS] [W.PRM]
[W.GRPH] [STSRT]
[TIME→]
[←TIME]
w

[H–DOBL]
[H–HALF]
w

[STSRT]
[CH–1↑]
w

[CH–1↓]
[V–DOBL]
[V–HALF]

[STSRT]
[CH–2↑]
[CH–2↓]
[V–DOBL]
[V–HALF]

18

B–62445E/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI

MESSAGE SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Alarm display screen

[ALARM]

om
Message display screen

[MSG]

r.c
Alarm history screen

[HISTRY] [(OPRT)] [CLEAR]

e
HELP SCREEN
nt
Soft key transition triggered by the function key HELP
ce
HELP
nc

Alarm detail screen

[1 ALAM] [(OPRT)] [SELECT]
.c

Operation method screen
w

[2 OPR] [(OPRT)] [SELECT]

Parameter table screen
w

[3 PARA]
w

19

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03

GRAPHIC SCREEN (T series) Soft key transition triggered by the function key GRAPH

Tool path graphics

Mode 0 GRAPH

Tool path graphics

[G.PRM] [NORMAL]

om
[(OPRT)]

[GRAPH] [(OPRT)] [HEAD]
[ERASE]
[PROCES]
[EXEC]
[STOP]

r.c
[ZOOM] [(OPRT)] [ACT]
[HI/LO]

e
A.ST/Path graphics

Mode 1 to 3 GRAPH
nt
A.ST/Path graphics
ce
[G.PRM] [(OPRT)] [NORMAL]
[ENTRY]

[A.PRM] [(OPRT)] [NORMAL]
nc

[ENTRY]

[GRAPH] [(OPRT)] [HEAD]
[ERASE]
[PROCES]
.c

[EXEC]
[STOP]
w

[SIDE]
[FRONT]
w

[OPEN]
[ZOOM] [(OPRT)] [EXEC]
[HI/LO]
w

20

B–62445E/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI

GRAPHIC SCREEN (M series) Soft key transition triggered by the function key GRAPH

Tool path graphics

GRAPH

Tool path graphics

[PARAM]

om
[EXEC] [(OPRT)] [AUTO]
[STSRT]
[STOP]
[REWIND]
[CLEAR]

r.c
[ZOOM] [(OPRT)] [EXEC]
[←]
[→]
[POS]
[↑]
[↓]

e
Solid graphics

GRAPH
nt
ce
Solid graphics

[PARAM]
nc

[BLANK] [(OPRT)] [ANEW]
[+ROT]
[–ROT]
[+TILT]
.c

[–TILT]

[EXEC] [(OPRT)] [A.ST]]
[F.ST]
w

[STOP]
[REWIND]

[REVIEW] [(OPRT)] [ANEW]
w

[+ROT]
[–ROT]
[+TILT]
w

[–TILT]

[PARAM]

[3–PLN] [(OPRT)] [ ]
[←]
[→]
[↑]
[↓]

21

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03

1.2
SCREEN DISPLAYED
IMMEDIATELY AFTER
POWER IS TURNED
ON

1.2.1
Slot Status Display Types of PCBs mounted on the slots are displayed.

om
If a hardware trouble or an incorrect mounting is found, this screen is
displayed.

D Slot state screen

r.c
SLOT CONFIGURATION DISPLAY

0: 003E4000 0:
1: 30464202 1:

e
2: 00504303 2:
3: 3:
4: 4:
nt 5:

5:

ce
Physical slot number (2ndary side)
nc

Module ID of the PCB mounted (*1)
Physical slot number (primary side)

*1) Module ID of PCB
××f f j j∆∆
.c

Internal slot number
Module function (software ID)
w

Type of PCB (module ID)

D Module ID 90 : Series 16 main CPU (For 4–axis) 9C : Series16 option 2
w

B2 : Series 16 main CPU (For 4–axis) B7 : Series16 option 2
A7 : Series 16 main CPU (For 6–axis) B0 : Series16/18 option 2
AD : Series 18 main CPU (For 4–axis)
w

AE : Series 18 main CPU (For 6–axis)
3F : Remote buffer DNC1
90 : PMC–RC
46 : I/O card (Sink type)
5F : I/O card (Source type)
A8 : I/O card with power supply (Sink type)
B1 : I/O card with power supply (Source type)
6D : CAP–II
45 : Graphic (CAP–II)
9A : Graphic

22

B–62445E/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI 

Software ID 40 : Main CPU 49 : CAP II
41 : Option 3 board 4A : Remote buffer
42 : Built–in I/O card 43 : Sub CPU
4E : 4F :
45 : Graphic
50 : Additional 4–axis control (FS16 option 2)
46 : Graphic (CAP II)

1.2.2

om
Setting Module Screen

r.c
CNC control
B0A1–01 software

SERVO : 9060–01 Digital servo
SUB : xxxx–xx ROM

e
OMM : yyyy–yy Sub CPU
(Remote buffer)
PMC : zzzz–zz
nt Order made
macro/macro
compiler
ce
PMC

1.2.3
nc

Configuration Display
of Software
.c

CNC control
B0A1–01 software
w

SERVO : 9060–01 Digital servo
SUB : xxxx–xx ROM
OMM : yyyy–yy Sub CPU
w

(Remote buffer)
PMC : zzzz–zz
Order made
macro/macro
w

compiler

PMC

23

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03

1.3 After the system has been installed correctly, you can find the PCBs
installed and the softwares integrated on the system configuration screen.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
SCREEN

1.3.1 (1) Press SYSTEM key.
Display Method
(2) Press soft key [system],then the system configuration screen is
displayed.

om
(3) The system configuration screen is composed of three screens and
PAGE
each of them can be selected by the page key PAGE
.

r.c
1.3.2
Configuration of PCBs

e 
Screen
Software series of mod-
nt SYSTEM CONFIG (SLOT)
ule with CPU

PAGE01
ce
SLOT MODULE ID SERIES VERSION
00 0090 : 40 B0A1 0006 Software version
0D 009A : 45 600E 0003 of module with
CPU
02 013F : 4A B401 0001
nc

03 019D : 41 4068 0001
.c

Software ID (type)
w

Module ID
w

Slot No.
(808F is 2nd side)
w

24

B–62445E/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI 

Module ID 90 : Series 16 main CPU (For 4–axis) 9C : Series16 option 2
B2 : Series 16 main CPU (For 4–axis) B7 : Series16 option 2
A7 : Series 16 main CPU (For 6–axis) B0 : Series16/18 option 2
AD : Series 18 main CPU (For 4–axis)
AE : Series 18 main CPU (For 6–axis)
3F : Remote buffer DNC1
90 : PMC–RC
46 : I/O card (Sink type)
5F : I/O card (Source type)
A8 : I/O card with power supply (Sink type)

om
B1 : I/O card with power supply (Source type)
6D : CAP–II
45 : Graphic (CAP–II)
9A : Graphic 

Software ID 40 : Main CPU 49 : CAP II

r.c
41 : Option 3 board 4A : Remote buffer
42 : Built–in I/O card 43 : Sub CPU
4E : MAP 4F :
45 : Graphic

e
50 : Additional 4–axis control (FS16 option 2)
46 : Graphic (CAP–II)
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

25

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03

1.3.3
Kind of software
Software Configuration Software series
Screen
SYSTEM CONFIG(SOFTWARE)

SYSTEM BD11 0001 Software version
FC1A FC2A F81A F82A
Software
F41A F42A F01A F02A configuration
SERVO 9050 0001

om
PMC 4062 0001
LADDER FS16 0001 Character written on
MACRO BBBB bbbb PMC title screen

Character written
on macro compiler
and on CAP.

e r.c
1.3.4
Module Configuration
nt
Configuration of the modules displayed on PCB.
(1)

Screen
ce
SYSTEM CONFIG(MODULE)

SLOT 00 MAIN CPU BOARD (2)
FLASH ROM MODULE : 6MB
DRAM MODULE : 6MB
nc

ADDITIONAL SRAM : ___
PMC MODULE : PMP+SLC
CRTC MODULE : 9ICRT
SERVO 1/2 AXIS MODULE : MOUNTED (4)
SERVO 3/4 AXIS MODULE : ___
.c

SERIAL SPINDLE LSI : MOUNTED
ANALOG SPINDLE LSI : ___

(3)
w

EDIT **** *** *** 16:53:44
[ PARMA ][ DGNOS ][ PMC ][ SYSTEM ][ ]
w

Contents of display
w

(1) Slot number (The number is corresponding to PCB configuration
screen)
(2) Type of PCB mounted
(3) Type of mounted module or hardware
(4) Mounted or not, or type of module
Pressing the PAGE key displays the system configuration screen of
other PCBs.
*Refer to ”Construction of Control Unit PCB” for correspondence
with each module and display.

26

B–62445E/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI

1.4
ALARM HISTORY
SCREEN

1.4.1 Alarms generated in the NC are recorded. The latest 25 alarms generated
General are recorded. The 26th and former alarms are deleted.

1.4.2

om
Screen Display (1) Press MESSAGE
key .
(2) Press soft key [HISTRY] and an alarm history screen is displayed.
PAGE
(3) Other pages are displayed by or key.

r.c
PAGE

ALARM HISTORY O1234 N12345

91/04/18 20:56:26

e
506 OVERTRAVEL : +X
91/04/18 19:58:11
000 TURN OFF POWER
nt 91/04/18 19:52:45
000 TURN OFF POWER
91/04/18 19:48:43
300 APC ALARM : X–AXIS ZERO RETURN REQUEST
ce
91/04/18 18:10:10
507 OVERTRAVEL : +B
nc

[ ALARM ][ MSG ][ HISTRY ][ ][ (OPE) ]
.c

1.4.3 (1) Press soft key [(OPE)].
Clearing Alarm History (2) Press soft key [(CLEAR], then the alarm history is cleared.
w

1.4.4 When an external alarm (No. 1000 to 1999) or a macro alarm (No. 3000
Alarm Display to 3999) is output, the alarm history function can record both the alarm
w

number and message if so specified in the following parameter. If
recording of the message is not set or if no message is input, only an
external alarm or macro alarm is displayed.
w

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 EAH

[Data type] Bit
#3 (EAH) The alarm history function:
0 : Does not record the messages output with external alarms or macro
alarms.
1 : Records the messages output with external alarms or macro alarms.

27

c 1. [ALARM] [MGS] [HISTRY] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]>> ↑ (3) Press the [MSGHIS] soft key. (2) The MS1 and MS0 bits (bits 7 and 6 of parameter 3113) specify the w number of records to be displayed on the external operator message history screen. OPERATOR The record can be viewed on the external operator message history screen. MESSAGE HISTORY O1234 N12345 → Date. When the bits are changed. e 93/04/01 17:25:00 PAGE : 1 No. MESSAGES RECORD 1.1.2 w Deletion of External (1) The recorded external operator message can be deleted by setting the Operator Messages MMC bit (bit 0 of parameter 3113) to 1. w Pressing the [CLEAR] soft key erases all the records of the external Record operator message.5. all external operator message records retained up to that point are erased. om Screen Display (2) Press the rightmost soft key [>>]. press the PAGE or key. time. **** nt Up to 255 characters ce Display range nc MEM STRT MTN FIN ALM 17:25:00 [ ][ MSGHIS ][ ][ ][ ] . r. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 1.1 (1) Press the MESSAGE function key. 28 .c PAGE (4) To display the previous or subsequent screen.5 This function enables the saving of external operator messages as a EXTERNAL record. and page → Message No.5.

1 : Can be erased.MS1 These bits set the number of characters to be retained in each record of an external operator message.B–62445E/03 1. The system continues to perform update until another external operator message is w specified or until an instruction to delete the records of the external operator message is specified. Number of records ters in each record r. 1 : Displayed. w 1.4 When the number of an external operator message is specified. as shown in the following table: MS1 MS0 Number of charac.3 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3113 MS1 MS0 MHC #0 (MHC) The records of an external operator message: 0 : Cannot be erased. . #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3112 OMH nc #2 (OMH) The external operator message history screen is: 0 : Not displayed. 29 . the system w Notes starts updating the records of the specified message. briefly turn the power off. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI 1.5.c 0 0 255 8 0 1 200 10 1 0 100 18 e 1 1 50 32 * ntAn external operator message of up to 255 characters can be specified.5. 3113) selects the number of records by limiting the number of ce characters to be retained as the record of an external operator message. as well as the number of records. then on again. Combining the MS1 bit and MS0 bit (bits 7 and 6 of parameter No. om MS0.c Note) After setting this parameter.

c 3106 OHS OPH [Data type] Bit #4 (OPH) The operation history screen is: e 0 : Not displayed. w 3122 Interval at which the clock time is recorded in the operation history [Data type] Word w [Units of data] Minutes [Valid data range] 0 to 1439 w The clock time is recorded to the operation history at specified intervals.6. This function records the following data: (1) MDI key operations performed by the NC operator (2) Status changes (ON/OFF) of input and output signals (selected signals only) (3) Details of NC alarms (4) Time stamp (date and time) om 1. The time is recorded only when data is recorded within the corresponding interval.1 Parameter Setting #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 r.c 1 : Enabled. l 1 : Displayed. If zero is set as the interval. ce 1 : Not sampled. OPERATION HISTORY together with the corresponding NC alarms.6 This function displays the key and signal operations performed by the NC operator upon the occurrence of a fault or the output of an NC alarm. . DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 1. nt #7 (OHS) The operation history is: 0 : Sampled. ten minutes is assumed. 30 . #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3112 OPH nc [Data type] Bit OPH The operation history function is: 0 : Disabled.1.

2 Screen Display  Displaying the operation (1) Press the SYSTEM function key.SRH] [ ] w (4) To display the next part of the operation history.5↑ 22 <POS> r. The [OPEHIS] [(OPRT)] soft key are displayed.6. the soft keys are configured as shown below: nc Í [ ] [  ] [DGNOS] [PMC] [SYSTEM] [(OPE)] [ ] ã push [ ] [W.6↑ 14 F0000. pressing the cursor key scrolls the screen by half a page.DATA 01 92/06/03 11 F0000.0↓ 02 08:40:00 12 F0000.B–62445E/03 1.DATA No. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI 1. The screen is scrolled by one row. history (2) Press the continue menu key [ ].7↓ 30 4 nt EDIT **** *** *** [ TOP ][ BOTTOM ][ ][ 08:20:52 ][PG.c [ ] [  ] [SG–SEL] [ ] [ ] [(OPE)] [ ] ã push [ ] [ TOP ] [BOTTOM][ ] [ ] [PG. These soft keys can also be used: 1 Pressing the [TOP] soft key displays the first page (oldest data). To display the interface between two pages.c 03 <DELETE> 13 F0001. 31 . (3) Press the [OPEHIS] soft key twice.0↑ 16 92/06/03 26 O 07 G0009.0↑ 23 <PROG> 04 F0000.7↑ 21 F0001. 3 Pressing the [PG.DGNS] [ ] [ ] [OPEHIS] [(OPE)] [ ] ã push .2↑ 18 <PROG> 28 2 09 ST↑ 19 <RESET> 29 3 10 ST↓ 20 F0000. om OPERATION HISTORY O1234 N12345 Page : 123 No.SRH] ce On the operation history screen. The next page is displayed. On a 14–inch CRT screen.SRH] soft key displays a specified page.1↑ 17 09:27:49 27 1 e 08 G0009. press cursor key or w . press the page down PAGE w key . 2 Pressing the [BOTTOM] soft key displays the last page (latest data). The operation history screen is displayed.DATA No.5↓ 24 <RESET> 05 MEM 15 P/S0010 25 EDIT 06 G0009.

4 Soft key: [SF1]. etc. . . (. +. Data displayed on the operation history screen (1) MDI keys Address and numeric keys are displayed after a single space. nc Indicates the bit. etc.c SBK ↑ (Indicates that the single block switch is turned on.7↑ The ↑ mark indicates that the signal is turned on. 2 Address/numeric key: A to Z. . etc. om For two–path control. page 50 is displayed. etc. The ↓ mark indicates that the signal is turned off. Indicates the address. A key pressed at power–on is displayed in reverse video. PROG . . e RESET CAN 6 Key pressed at power–on: nt (2) Input and output signals RESET General signals are displayed in the following format: ce G0000. 5 Other key: . Soft keys are displayed in square brackets ([]). (EOB).SRH] key.) w w w 32 .1. [SF2]. Some signals are indicated by their symbol names. 1 Function key: POS . 0 to 9. –. for example) are displayed in angle brackets (<>). r. OFFSET SETTING .c 3 Page/cursor key: PAGE . DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 Example) By entering 50 then pressing the [PG. but preceded by S_. the operations of path 2 are displayed in the same way. Other keys (RESET/INPUT.

but preceded by S_.c (3) NC alarms NC alarms are displayed in reverse video. system alarms. the operations of path 2 are displayed in the same way.) w For two–path control. w Example) P/S0050. only the alarm type is displayed. and external alarms are displayed together w with their numbers.B–62445E/03 1. (No details are displayed. S_APC_ALM (4) Time stamp (date and time) The following time data (date and time) is recorded: 1 Date and time of power–on 2 Date and time of power–off 3 Date and time when an NC alarm occurs 4 The clock time is recorded at predetermined intervals. SV_ALM. P/S alarms. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI Mode selection signals and rapid traverse override signals are displayed as indicated below: Input signal Name displayed MD1 ND2 MD4 REF DNC1 0 0 0 0 0 MDI 1 0 0 0 0 MEM 1 0 0 0 1 RMT om 0 1 0 0 0 NOMODE 1 1 0 0 0 EDT 0 0 1 0 0 H/INC r.c 1 0 1 0 0 JOG 1 0 1 1 0 REF 0 1 1 0 0 TJOG e 1 1 1 0 0 THND nt Input signal RV1 RV2 Name displayed ce 0 0 R 100% 1 0 R 50% nc 0 1 R 25% 1 1 R F0% . For other types of alarms. 33 . together with each new calendar day.

09:15:30 ==== Hour:Minute:Second Each new calendar day is displayed in reverse video. If zero is set. 3) At predetermined intervals.c Note The clock time is recorded for a specified interval only when e data is stored within that interval.1. the time is stamped at ten–minute intervals. ADDRES SIGNAL 01 X0000 00001000 11 G0000 00000001 . 92/01/20 ==== Year/Month/Day 09:15:30 ==== Hour:Minute:Second If a system alarm occurs. the operation history ce (2) Press the continue menu key [ ].c 02 X0004 10000000 12 G0004 00000011 03 X0008 00001100 13 G0008 00000111 04 X0009 00111000 14 G0003 00001111 05 X0012 00001111 15 G0043 01100000 w 06 Y0000 01000000 16 ******** 07 Y0004 00110000 17 ******** 08 Y0007 00011100 18 ******** w 09 Y0008 00011100 19 ******** 10 Y0010 00011100 20 ******** > EDIT **** *** * * * 00:00:00 w [OPEHIS] [SG–SEL] [ ] [ ] [ (OPE) ] 34 . 3122. then press the [SG–SEL] soft key. Set the interval in minutes in parameter No. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 1) The power–on time is displayed as shown below: 92/01/20 ==== Year/Month/Day 09:15:30 ==== Hour:Minute:Second 2) The power–off time and the time when an NC alarm occurred are displayed in reverse video. nc OP_HIS SIGNAL SELECT O1000 N02000 No. The [OPEHIS] (operation history) soft key is displayed. the date and time are not recorded. The operation history signal selection screen is displayed. the clock time is displayed in reverse om video.  Input signal or output signal to be recorded in nt (1) P ress the SYSTEM function key. ADDRES SIGNAL No. (3) Press the [OPEHIS] soft key. 92/01/20 ==== Year/Month/Day r.

position the cursor to that bit by pressing the cursor key or . (7) To delete a selected signal address. it can be cancelled by pressing the [CAN] key. press the [ON:1] soft key while the cursor is positioned to 00000000 . ADDRES SIGNAL 01 G0004 00000010 11 ******** 02 ******** 12 ******** 03 ******** 13 ******** om 04 ******** 14 ******** 05 ******** 15 ******** 06 ******** 16 ******** 07 ******** 17 ******** 08 ******** 18 ******** 09 ******** 19 ******** r. (4) Select the bit to be recorded.c 10 ******** 20 ******** > EDIT **** *** *** *** 00:00:00 [ ALLDEL ][ DELETE ][ ON:1 ][ OFF:0 ][ ] e (2) Press the cursor key or to position the cursor to a desired position. to Be Recorded in The OP_HIS SIGNAL SELECT O1000 N02000 Operation History No. press the [(OPE)] soft Signal or Output Signal key. then press the key. If the [ALLDEL] key is pressed by mistake.c To select a particular bit. To cancel w a selection made by pressing the [ON:1] soft key or to cancel a previously selected signal. INPUT ce Example) G0004 INPUT Signal address G0004 is set in the ADDRES column. In the SIGNAL column. G. To select all bits of the specified signal address. . then press the [ON:1] soft key. press the [OFF:0] soft key. nt (3) Key in a signal type (X.3 Setting The Input (1) On the operation history signal selection screen. The corresponding position in the SIGNAL column is initialized to nc 000000000.6.1. w (5) Up to 20 addresses can be specified by means of this signal selection. 35 . If the [DELET] key is pressed by mistake.B–62445E/03 1. These addresses need not always be specified at consecutive positions. asterisks ******** are displayed in place of the deleted data. starting from No. w (6) Pressing the [ALLDEL] and [EXEC] soft keys deletes all data. In the ADDRES column. the corresponding position is cleared. position the cursor to the corresponding position then press the [DELETE] and [EXEC] soft keys. ADDRES SIGNAL No. F. or Y) and an address. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI 1. it can be cancelled by pressing the [CAN] key.

3 A signal indicated by its symbol name will also be displayed by its symbol name. either.1.c G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP f f f *IT w G009 f f f f f f f f : w G013 f f f f f f f f G014 f f f f f f f f w G015 f f f f f f f f : G018 f f f f f f f f G019 RT f f f f f f f 36 . M/T addresses r. 1.c MT→PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X000 f f f f f f f f : e X127 f f f f f f f f PMC→CNC G000 : #7 f nt #6 f #5 f #4 f #3 f #2 f #1 f #0 f ce G003 f f f f f f f f G004 f f f f FIN f f f nc G005 f f f f TFIN SFIN f MFIN G006 f f f f f *ABS f SRN G007 RLSOT EXLM *FLUP f f ST STLK f . om 2 A circle (Ę) indicates that a signal can be recorded. D Input signals and output signals to be recorded in the history Notes 1 A cross ( ) indicates that a signal will not be recorded. any signal for which an address is not specified will not be recorded. Also. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 (8) Pressing the return menu key [ ] causes the [OPEHIS] (OPE) soft key to be displayed again.

c G047 f f f f f f f f : G060 f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f e G061 RGTA G062 f f f f f f f f : G099 f f nt f f f f f f ce G100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1 G101 f f f f f f f f nc G102 –J8 –J7 –J6 –J5 –J4 –J3 –J2 –J1 G103 f f f f f f f f : .c G105 f f f f f f f f G106 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 w G107 f f f f f f f f w G108 MLK8 MLK7 MLK6 MLK5 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1 G109 f f f f f f f f w G110 +LM8 +LM7 +LM6 +LM5 +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1 G111 f f f f f f f f G112 –LM8 –LM7 –LM6 –LM5 –LM4 –LM3 –LM2 –LM1 G113 f f f f f f f f G114 *+L8 *+L7 *+L6 *+L5 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1 37 . DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G020 f f f f f f f f : G042 f f f f f f f f G043 f × f × × f f f G044 f f f f f f MLK BDT1 om G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2 G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 f SBK f r.B–62445E/03 1.

1.c : G125 f f f f f f f f G126 SVF8 SVF7 SVF6 SVF5 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1 e G127 f f f f f f f f : nt G129 f f f f f f f f ce G130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1 G131 f f f f f f f f G132 f f f f +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1 nc G133 f f f f f f f f G134 f f f f –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1 .c G135 f f f f f f f f : w G255 f f f f f f f f w PMC→MT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 w Y000 f f f f f f f f : Y127 f f f f f f f f CNC→PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F000 f f f f f f f f : F255 f f f f f f f f 38 . DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G115 f f f f f f f f G116 *–L8 *–L7 *–L6 *–L5 *–L4 *–L3 *–L2 *–L1 G117 f f f f f f f f G118 *+ED8 *+ED7 *+ED6 *+ED5 *+ED4 *+ED3 *+ED2 *+ED1 om G119 f f f f f f f f G120 *–ED8 *–ED7 *–ED6 *–ED5 *–ED4 *–ED3 *–ED2 *–ED1 G121 f f f f f f f f r.

DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI 2. List of Address for 2–path control MT→PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X000 f f f f f f f f : X127 f f f f f f f f PMC→CNC (Signals for tool post 1) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G000 f f f f f f f f om : G003 f f f f f f f f G004 f f f f FIN f f f r.c G019 RT f f f f f f f G020 f f f f f f f f w : G042 f f f f f f f f w G043 f × f × × f f f w G044 f f f f f f MLK BDT1 G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2 G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 f SBK f G047 f f f f f f f f : G060 f f f f f f f f 39 .c G005 f f f f TFIN SFIN f MFIN G006 f f f f f *ABS f SRN e G007 RLSOT EXLM *FLUP f f ST STLK f G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP f f f *IT G009 : f ntf f f f f f f ce G013 f f f f f f f f G014 f f f f f f f f nc G015 f f f f f f f f : G018 f f f f f f f f .B–62445E/03 1.

c G103 f f f f f f f f : G105 f f f f f f f f e G106 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 SMI1 G107 f f f f f f f f G108 MLK8 nt MLK7 MLK6 MLK5 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1 ce G109 f f f f f f f f G110 +LM8 +LM7 +LM6 +LM5 +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1 nc G111 f f f f f f f f G112 –LM8 –LM7 –LM6 –LM5 –LM4 –LM3 –LM2 –LM1 . DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G061 f f f f f f f RGTA G062 f f f f f f f f : G099 f f f f f f f f G100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1 om G101 f f f f f f f f G102 –J8 –J7 –J6 –J5 –J4 –J3 –J2 –J1 r.1.c G113 f f f f f f f f G114 *+L8 *+L7 *+L6 *+L5 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1 w G115 f f f f f f f f w G116 *–L8 *–L7 *–L6 *–L5 *–L4 *–L3 *–L2 *–L1 G117 f f f f f f f f w G118 *+ED8 *+ED7 *+ED6 *+ED5 *+ED4 *+ED3 *+ED2 *+ED1 G119 f f f f f f f f G120 *–ED8 *–ED7 *–ED6 *–ED5 *–ED4 *–ED3 *–ED2 *–ED1 G121 f f f f f f f f : G125 f f f f f f f f 40 .

DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G126 SVF8 SVF7 SVF6 SVF5 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1 G127 f f f f f f f f : G129 f f f f f f f f G130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1 om G131 f f f f f f f f G132 f f f f +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1 G133 f f f f f f f f r.c G1007 RLSOT EXLM *FLUP f f ST STLK f w G1008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP f f f *IT G1009 f f f f f f f f : w G1013 f f f f f f f f w G1014 f f f f f f f f G1015 f f f f f f f f : G1018 f f f f f f f f G1019 RT f f f f f f f 41 .c G134 f f f f –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1 G135 f f f f f f f f : e G255 f f f f f f f f G1000 #7 f nt PMC→CNC (Signals for the 2–path) #6 f #5 f #4 f #3 f #2 f #1 f #0 f ce : G1003 f f f f f f f f G1004 f f f f FIN f f f nc G1005 f f f f TFIN SFIN f MFIN G1006 f f f f f *ABS f SRN .B–62445E/03 1.

c G1061 f f f f f f f RGTA G1062 f f f f f f f f : e G1099 f f f f f f f f G1100 +J8 nt +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1 ce G1101 f f f f f f f f G1102 –J8 –J7 –J6 –J5 –J4 –J3 –J2 –J1 f f f f f f f f nc G1103 : G1105 f f f f f f f f . DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1020 f f f f f f f f : G1042 f f f f f f f f G1043 f × f × × f f f G1044 f f f f f f MLK BDT1 G1045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2 om G1046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 f SBK f G1047 f f f f f f f f : G1060 f f f f f f f f r.1.c G1106 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 SMI1 G1107 f f f f f f f f w G1108 MLK8 MLK7 MLK6 MLK5 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1 f f f f f f f f w G1109 G1110 +LM8 +LM7 +LM6 +LM5 +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1 w G1111 f f f f f f f f G1112 –LM8 –LM7 –LM6 –LM5 –LM4 –LM3 –LM2 –LM1 G1113 f f f f f f f f G1114 *+L8 *+L7 *+L6 *+L5 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1 G1115 f f f f f f f f 42 .

DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1116 *–L8 *–L7 *–L6 *–L5 *–L4 *–L3 *–L2 *–L1 G1117 f f f f f f f f G1118 *+ED8 *+ED7 *+ED6 *+ED5 *+ED4 *+ED3 *+ED2 *+ED1 G1119 f f f f f f f f G1120 *–ED8 *–ED7 *–ED6 *–ED5 *–ED4 *–ED3 *–ED2 *–ED1 om G1121 f f f f f f f f : G1125 f f f f f f f f G1126 SVF8 SVF7 SVF6 SVF5 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1 r.c G1127 f f f f f f f f : G1129 f f f f f f f f e G1130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1 G1131 G1132 f f ntf f f f f f f +MIT4 f +MIT3 f +MIT2 f +MIT1 ce G1133 f f f f f f f f G1134 f f f f –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1 nc G1135 f f f f f f f f : G1255 f f f f f f f f .c PMC→MT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 w Y000 f f f f f f f f : Y127 f f f f f f f f w CNC→PMC (Signals for the 1–path) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 w F000 f f f f f f f f : F255 f f f f f f f f CNC→PMC (Signals for the 2–path) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1000 f f f f f f f f : F1255 f f f f f f f f 43 .B–62445E/03 1.

(2) Press the key. The . Data other than the identifier words depends on the type. For extension (date or time) 5. MDI/soft key of path 2 nc 6. Signal of path 2 7. and [EXEC] in this order. . in this order. then select the operation history display screen.4 Recorded data can be output to an input/output unit connected via a Inputting and reader/punch interface. set a code in the ISO bit of a setting parameter (bit 1 of parameter No. [PUNCH]. An output record can be input from the input/output unit.c operation history data is divided into four parts by identifier words. MDI/soft key ce 2.6. w T(identifier word) T0 : Header w T50 : MDI/soft key T51 : Signal T52 : Alarm T53 : For extension (date or time) w T54 : MDI/soft key of path 2 T55 : Signal of path 2 T56 : Alarm of path 2 44 . DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 1. To output the data.1. [READ]. e SYSTEM (3) Press the soft keys [(OPE)]. nt order. om (2) Press the SYSTEM key. outputting the Set the input/output unit to be used in setting parameters No. 0020). 0020 and operation history data 0100 to 0135. Alarm of path 2 The header and recorded operation data are output. Alarm 4. and [EXEC] in this  Output data format 1.c stored under file name OPERATION HISTORY.  Input (1) Select EDIT mode. (3) Press the soft keys [(OPE)]. The data output to the FANUC Floppy Cassette or FANUC FA Card is r.  Output (1) Select EDIT mode. Signal 3. . then select the operation history display screen.

C: Data word 2 MDI/soft key om T 5 0 P 0 to 1 H * * .) 3 Signal e T 5 1 P 0 to 6 N 0 to 255 H * * . * * .c H **: KCB code (See the following table. ntP0: X0000 and above New data Old data P2: G0000 and above ce P4: Y0000 and above P6: F0000 and above N***: DI/DO number nc H **: Signal information data (hexadecimal) .c w w w 45 .B–62445E/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI 1 Header T 0 C O P E R A T I O N H I S T O R Y . P0: Usually P1: At power–on r.

000 P2: P/S No. 0001 to 254 P4: Overtravel alarm om P5: Overheat alarm P6: Servo alarm P7: System alarm P8: APC alarm r.. ce Time T 5 3 P 0 to 1 E 1 D * * * * * * . 1992 D 1 9 9 2 1 0 2 9 w w w 46 .c P9: Spindle alarm P10: P/S alarm No. 5000 to 5999 P15: External alarm N****: Alarm number (for P/S alarm.*: Data Example) October 29. and external e alarm only) Date T 5 3 P nt 5 For extension (date or time) 0 to 1 E 0 D * * * * * * * * . P0: P/S No. 101 P3: P/S No. P0: Usually nc P1: At power–on E0: Date E1: Time . system alarm.c D*. 100 P1: P/S No.1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 4 Alarm T 5 2 P 0 to 10 N * * * * .

B–62445E/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI

6 MDI/soft key of path 2

T 5 4 P 0 to 1 H * * ;

P0: Usually
P1: At power–on
H **: KCB code (See the following table.)

7 Signal of path 2

om
T 5 5 P 2, 6 N 1000 to 1255 H * * , * * ;

New data Old data
P2: G1000 and above

r.c
P6: F1000 and above
N***: DI/DO number
H **: Signal information data (hexadecimal)

e
8 Alarm of path 2
nt T 5 6 P 0 to 10 N * * * * ;
ce
P0: P/S No. 100
P1: P/S No. 000
P2: P/S No. 101
P3: P/S No. 0001 to 254
nc

P4: Overtravel alarm
P5: Overheat alarm
P6: Servo alarm
.c

P7: System alarm
P8: APC alarm
P9: Spindle alarm
w

P10: P/S alarm No. 5000 to 5999
P15: External alarm
w

N****: Alarm number (for P/S alarm, system alarm, and external
alarm only)
w

47

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03

KCB codes (MDI/soft key)
(00H to 7FH)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0 Space 0 @ P

1 ! 1 A Q

2 ” 2 B R

om
3 # 3 C S

4 $ 4 D T

r.c
5 % 5 E U

6 & 6 F V

e
7 ’ 7 G W
nt
8 ( 8 H X
ce
9 ) 9 I Y

A ; * : J Z
(EOB)
nc

B + K [

C ’ < L o
.c

D – = M ]
w

E . > N
w

F / ? O –
w

48

B–62445E/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI

(80H to FFH)
8 9 A B C D E F

0 Reset F0
* *

1 MMC F1
* *

2 CNC F2
* *

om
3 F3
*

4 Shift Insert F4
* *

5 Delete F5

r.c
* *

6 CAN Alter F6
* *

e
7 F7
*

nt
8

9
Cur→

Cur←
*
Input
*
Positn

Progrm
*
F8

F9
*
ce
* * *

A Cur↓ Help Offset
* * *
nc

B Cur↑ System
* *

C Messeg
*
.c

D Grp/Cs
*1*
w

E Page↓ Custom FR
* * *

F Page↑ Fapt FL
w

* * *

*1:On the small–sized keypad, ED corresponds to the Graph/Custom key.
w

On a standard keyboard, ED corresponds to the Graph key and EE to
the Custom key.
* : Command key

49

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03

1.6.5
Notes (1) While the operation history screen is displayed, no information can be
recorded to the history.
(2) An input signal having an on/off width of up to 16 msec is not recorded
in the history. Some signals are not recorded in the history. See
Appendix 1.
(3) Once the storage becomes full, old data is deleted, starting from the
oldest record. Up to about 8000 key information items can be
recorded.

om
(4) The recorded data is retained even after the power is turned off. A
memory all clear operation, however, erases the recorded data.
(5) The operation history function cannot execute sampling when the
OHS bit (bit 7 of parameter No. 3106) is set to 1.

r.c
(6) Set the date and time on the setting screen.
(7) The time needed to input and output 6000 operation records at a rate
of 4800 baud is as follows:
Output:About 5 minutes

e
Input: About 2 minutes and 30 seconds
This file corresponds to a paper tape of about 180 m in length.
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

50

B–62445E/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI

1.7
HELP FUNCTION

1.7.1
General The help function displays alarm information, operation method and a
table of contents for parameters. This function is used as a handbook.

om
1.7.2 Press HELP key on any screen other than PMC screen, then a help screen
Display Method appears.
(However, it is not available when PMC screen is displaying) 

Display of help screen

r.c
HELP (INITIAL MENU) O1234 N12345

***** HELP *****
1. ALARM DETAIL
2. OPERATION METHOD

e
3. PARAMETER TABLE

nt
ce
[1 ALAM] [2 OPE] [3 PARA] [ ] [ ]
nc 

Help for alarm 1 When an alarm is generated, press soft key [1 ALAM], then a help
message of the alarm is displayed.
.c

HELP (INITIAL MENU) O1234 N12345
w

NUMBER : 010
M’SAGE : IMPROPER G CODE
FUNCTION :
ALARM :
w

A G CODE NOT LISTED IN G–CODE TABLE
IS BEING COMMANDED
ALSO G–CODE FOR FUNCTION NOT ADDED
w

IS BEING COMMANDED

[1 ALAM] [2 OPE] [3 PARA] [ ] [ OPRT ]

2 Pressing soft key [OPRT],(alarm No.), and soft key [SELECT] in
this order, a help message corresponding to the input alarm number is
displayed.

51

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 

Help for operation 1 Press [2 OPR], then a menu for operation method is displayed.

HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N12345

1. PROGRAM EDIT
2. SEARCH
3. RESET
4. DATA INPUT WITH MDI
5. DATA INPUT WITH TAPE
6. OUTPUT
7. INPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE
8. OUTPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE

om
9. MEMORY CLEAR

[1 ALARM] [2 OPR] [3 PARA] [ OPRT ]

r.c
2 Press [OPRT], (an item number) and soft key [SELECT], then an
operation method of the item is displayed.
PAGE
Pressing PAGE key or displays another pages.

e
PAGE

HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N12345
nt<<1.PROGRAM EDIT>>
DELETE ALL PROGRAMS
MODE :EDIT
1/4 Current
page/ Total
page

SCREEN :PROGRAM
ce
OPR :(0–9999) – (DELETE)

DELETE ONE PROGRAM
MODE : EDIT
nc

SCREEN : PROGRAM
OPR :(0+PROGRAM NUMBER) – <DELETE>
.c

[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [SELECT]
w
w
w

52

B–62445E/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI 

Parameter table Press soft key [3 PARA], then a parameter table is displayed.

HELP (PARAMETER TABLE) O1234 N12345
1/4 Current
page/ Total
·SETTING (NO.0000~ ) page
·READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE (NO.0100~ )
·AXIS CONTROL/SETTING UNIT (NO.1000~ )
·COORDINATE SYSTEM (NO.1200~ )
·STROKE LIMIT (NO.1300~ )
·FEED RATE (NO.1400~ )
·ACCEL/DECELERATION CTRL (NO.1600~ )
·SERVO RELATED (NO.1800~ )

om
·DI/DO (NO.3000~ )

[1 ALAM ] [2 OPR ][ 3 PARA ] [ ][SELECT]

r.c
PAGE
Another screen can be selected by the PAGE key PAGE
or .

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

53

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03

1.8
DISPLAYING
DIAGNOSTIC PAGE

1.8.1 (1) Press SYSTEM key.
Displaying Diagnostic
(2) Press soft key [DGN], then a diagnostic screen is displayed.
Page

om
1.8.2
Contents Displayed 
Causes when the

r.c
machine does not travel 000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL An auxiliary function is being
in spite of giving a executed.
command 001 MOTION Travel command of cycle
operation is being executed.

e
002 DWELL DWELL Dwell is being
executed.
nt
003 IN–POSITION CHECK
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0%
005 INTERLOCK/START LOCK
In–position check is being done.
Feedrate override is 0%.
Interlock or start lock is input.
ce
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK Waiting for spindle speed
arrival signal.
010 PUNCHING Data is being output through
reader/puncher interface.
011 READING Data is being input through
nc

reader/puncher interface.
012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP Waiting for the end of index
table indexing
013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% Manual feedrate override is 0%.
.c

014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP,RRW OFF NC is in reset state.
015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH External Program Number
Search External program
w

number search is being done
016 BACKGROUND ACTIVE Background is being used.
w
w

54

B–62445E/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI 

Cause of the cycle start
LED turned off
020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
021 RESET BUTTON ON
022 RESET AND REWIND ON 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
023 EMERGENCY STOP ON 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
024 RESET ON
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
025 STOP MOTION OR DWELL
1 1 1 1 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 0

Input of emergency stop signal

om
Input of external reset signal
Reset button On of MDI
Input of reset & rewind
Servo alarm generation
Switching to other mode, Feed hold

r.c
Single block stop 

State of TH alarm
030 CHARACTER NUMBER TH ALARM Position of the character that

e
caused TH alarm. The position
is counted from the head. 

Detail of Alarm 350 of
nt
031 TH DATA Data of the character that caused
TH alarm.
ce
serial pulse coder
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0202 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH

#6(CSA): Hardware of serial pulse coder is abnormal
nc

#5(BLA): Battery voltage is low (warning)
#4(PHA): Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is erroneous.
#3(RCA): Serial pulse coder is faulty.
.c

Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.
#2(BZA): Battery voltage became 0.
Replace the battery and set the reference position.
w

#1(CKA): Serial pulse coder is faulty.
Internal block stopped.
#0(SPH): Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is faulty.
w

Counting of feedback cable is erroneous. 
Detail of Alarm 351 of
w

serial pulse coder
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0203 DTE CRC STB

#7(DTE): Communication failure of serial pulse coder.
There is no response for communication.
#6(CRC): Communication failure of serial pulse coder.
Transferred data is erroneous.
#5(STB): Communication failure of serial pulse coder.
Transferred data is erroneous.

55

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 

Details of digital servo
alarm 414
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0200 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA

#7(OVL): Overload alarm
#6(LV): Insufficient voltage alarm
#5(OVC): Over current alarm
#4(HCA): Abnormal current alarm
#3(HVA): Overvoltage alarm

om
#2(DCA): Discharge alarm
#1(FBA): Disconnection alarm
#0(OFA): Overflow alarm
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

r.c
DGN 0201 ALD EXP

Overload 0 – – – Motor overheat
alarm 1 – – – Amplifier overheat

e
Disconnec- 1 – – 0 Built–in pulse coder (hand)
tion alarm 1 – – 1 Disconnection of separated type pulse
coder (hard)
0
nt – – 0 Disconnection of pulse coder (software)
ce
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0204 RAM OFS MCC LDA PMS

#6(OFS): Abnormal current value result of A/D conversion of digital
#5(MCC): Contacts of MCC of servo amplifier is melted.
nc

#4(LDA): Serial pulse coder LED is abnormal
#3(PMS): Feedback is not correct due to faulty serial pulse coder C or feedback
cable.
.c 

Detail of digital servo This data indicates the cause of servo alarm No. 417, detected by the NC.
alarm 417 If the alarm is detected by the servo, the PRM bit (bit 4 of DGN No. 0203)
is set to 1.
w

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0280 AXS DIR PLS PLC MOT
w

#0 (MOT): The motor type specified in parameter No. 2020 falls outside the
predetermined range.
#2 (PLC): The number of velocity feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in
w

parameter No. 2023, is zero or less. The value is invalid.
#3 (PLS): The number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in
parameter No. 2024, is zero or less. The value is invalid.
#4 (DIR): The wrong direction of rotation for the motor is specified in parameter No.
2022 (the value is other than 111 or –111).
#6 (AXS): In parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number), a value that falls outside the
range of 1 to the number of controlled axes is specified. (For example, 4 is
specified instead of 3.) Alternatively, the values specified in the
parameter are not consecutive.

56

001 mm (metric output). nc [Data type] Two–word axis [Units of data] Detection units DGN 381 Offset data from the Inductosyn . 1 : Spindle serial control 2nd spindle.c Off set data is displayed when CNC calculates the machine position. 57 . 1 : Spindle serial control is performed.0001 inch (inch output) [Valid data range] 0 to "99999999  Diagnostic data related e to the Inductosyn absolute position detector nt DGN 380 Difference between the absolute position of the motor and offset data ce M (absolute position of the motor) – S (offset data) λ(pitch interval) The remainder resulting from the division is displayed.B–62445E/03 1. #3(SS2) 0 : Spindle serial doesn’t control 2nd spindle. [Data type] Two–word axis w [Units of data] Detection units  Serial spindle w #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 0400 SAI SS2 SSR POS SIC w This data indicates the offset data received by the CNC while it is calculating the machine coordinates. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI  Position error amount DGN 0300 Position error of an axis in detection unit Feed rate [mm/min] 1 Position error= × 60 servo loop gain [1/sec] Detection unit  Machine position DGN 0301 Distance from reference position of an axis in detection unit om  Reference position shift function DGN 302 Distance from the end of the deceleration dog to the first grid point [Data type] Two–word axis r. #2(SSR) 0 : Spindle serial control is not performed. 1 : Spindle analog control is used. 0. #4(SAI) 0 : Spindle analog control is not used.c [Units of data] 0.

#4 (CME): No response was returned during automatic scanning. 1 : 1st spindle did not start normally in spindle serial control.c #0 (CRE): A CRC error occurred. Such problems are mainly caused by noise. e #3 (CER): An error occurred during reception.c #3 (SPE) In spindle serial control serial spindle parameters 0 : Satisfy start condition of spindle unit 1 : Do not satisfy start condition of spindle unit w #2 (S2E) 0 : 2nd spindle started normally in spindle serial control.1. w #1 (S1E) 0 : 1st spindle started normally in spindle serial control. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 #1 (POS) A module required for spindle analog control is 0 : not mounted 1 : mounted #0 (SIC) A module required for spindle serial control is 0 : not mounted 1 : mounted DGN 0401 Serial spindle alarm state of 1st spindle om DGN 0402 Serial spindle alarm state of 2nd spindle #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 0408 SSA SCA CME CER SNE FRE CRE r. #7 (SSA): A system alarm occurred on the spindle amplifier side. w #0 (SHE) 0 : Serial communication module is correct on CNC side. ce (These problems cause spindle alarm 749. (Warning) #1 (FRE): A framing error occurred. nc #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 0409 SPE S2E S1E SHE Refer to this diagnosis when alarm 750 has generated. disconnection. nt #5 (SCA): A communication alarm occurred on the spindle amplifier side. 1 : An error occurred in serial communication module on CNC side DGN 0410 Load meter of 1st spindle [%] DGN 0411 Speed meter of 1st spindle [%] DGN 0412 Load meter of 2nd spindle [%] 58 . (Warning) #2 (SNE): The transmission/reception target is invalid. 1 : 2nd spindle did not start normally in spindle serial control. . or instantaneous power–off).

calculated in terms of the spindle.B–62445E/03 1. accumulated value) w [Data type] Two–word w [Unit of data] Detection units 456 Instantaneous difference for the travel error. calculated in terms of the spindle.c DGN 455 Instantaneous difference for the move command. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI DGN 0413 Speed meter of 2nd spindle [%] DGN 0414 Position error in 1st spindle synchronous control mode DGN 0415 Position error in 2nd spindle synchronous control mode DGN 0416 Absolute value of synchronization error between 1st and 2nd spindles DGN 0417 Feedback information of 1st spindle position coder DGN 0418 Position error of 1st spindle position loop mode om DGN 0419 Feedback information of 2nd spindle position coder DGN 0420 Feedback information of 2nd spindle position coder  Diagnostic data related r. during rigid tapping (signed.c to rigid tapping DGN 450 Spindle position error during rigid tapping e [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection units DGN 451 nt Spindle distribution during rigid tapping ce [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection units nc DGN 454 Accumulated spindle distribution during rigid tapping [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] Detection units . w DGN during rigid tapping (signed) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection units DGN 457 Width of synchronization error during rigid tapping (maximum value) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection units 59 .

⋅ LGE is set to 1 when the speed is changed in polygon synchronization mode if the serial spindle control unit uses different loop gains for the first and second spindles during spindle synchronization. the two spindles must be controlled with an identical loop gain. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03  Two–spindle polygon This data indicates the status of the polygon synchronization mode. When SCO is set to 1. #1 (PST): Spindle polygon synchronization mode is starting. nc When this function is used. 5018.2. however. machining (T series only) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 470 SC0 LGE SCF PST SPL #0 (SPL): Spindle polygon synchronization is in progress. om #3: The spindle speed is being changed in spindle polygon synchronization mode. (The serial spindle control unit switches parameters according to the statuses of CTH1. SIND control <G0032. the operation is normal. and other signals. even though PST is set to 1 and the program is stopped in a block including G51. This may occur when the spindle cannot ce be activated because the PSTU bit (bit 7 of parameter No.1. SOV0 to SOV7 <G0030> and multispindle control signal <G0027> causes 0 or a value smaller than the resolution of spindle control to be programmed (the programmed value multiplied by 4095/highest– w spindle–speed is smaller than 1). one of the spindles cannot attain the polygon synchronization speed. #2: Spindle polygon synchronization mode is being released. G0033> is used and the programmed output is 0. Alternatively. 7603) is set to 0. nt ⋅ If the status does not change. #5: Not used r.c ⋅ SCO is set to 1 if either of the following occurs: The combination of the programmed S value and spindle control signals including *SSTP w <G0029. e <Note>⋅ If SPL and SCF are set to 1 and #1. 60 . the two spindles have different loop gains. The warning is displayed in DGN. #2. CTH2. but the warning does not cause an alarm. the spindle speed becomes 0. and does not cause P/S alarm No. is handled as a result of the program. and #3 are set to 0 in polygon synchronization mode. This. #4 (SCF): The spindle speed has been changed in spindle polygon synchronization mode. #7 (SC0): In spindle polygon synchronization mode. the specified speed is zero.) .c #6 (LGE): In spindle polygon synchronization mode. setting bit 0 of DGN w 471 to 1 and disabling the ratio of polygon synchronization rotation. #6>.

does not cause P/S alarm No. Q. The cause indication. exceeds 59998. The cause indication is retained until the cause is removed or until polygon synchronization mode is released. specified with G51. #2 (QCL): The second spindle (slave axis in polygon synchronization) is clamped. ⋅ SUO occurs if the number of distributed pulses for ITP exceeds 32767. 218 om If P/S alarm No. divided by the specified P value. 3741 to 3744. #4 to #7 →Cause of P/S alarm No. (The serial spindle. 7621. if the speed specified for the first axis. however. however. 61 . w Normal spindle speeds will not cause this alarm to be output. Alternatively. P/S alarm No.c 470 is set to 1). that is. second spindle.2. none of the P. PCL is not set to 1 provided the first spindle is connected correctly. causing the actual speed to be limited to the specified value. ⋅ PCL indicates that the speed specified for the master axis exceeds the w maximum speed for the first axis.) #5: A negative Q value is specified while the QDRC bit (bit 1 of parameter ce No.B–62445E/03 1. etc.2. 218 is cleared by issuing a reset. 5018 P/S alarm No. polygon synchronization mode is released. #0: The speed specified for spindle polygon synchronization is too low.) r. is not connected.) nt #4 (NSP): A spindle required for control is not connected. #6 (PQE): The P value or Q value. In other words. is retained until P/S alarm No. 5018 occurs when bit 7 of DGN 470 is set to 0. while bit 0 of DGN 471 is set to 1. falls outside the predetermined range. w ⋅ QCL is set to 1 when the polygon synchronization speed specified for the second spindle (slave axis in polygon synchronization) exceeds the value set in parameter No. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI This data indicates the cause of P/S alarm 5018 or 218. specified in parameters No. causing. Alternatively. an R value is specified. (The e speed is restricted to the upper limit for internal operations. (The unit speed becomes 0 for internal operations. nc #7 (NPQ): Although the P and Q values are not specified with G51. SUO occurs when a speed in excess of 59998 rpm is specified for the first axis if P is set to 1. #3 (SUO): The speed specified in spindle polygon synchronization is too high. <Note>⋅ Bit 0 is set to 1 even when the specified spindle speed is 0 (bit 7 of DGN . 7603) is set to 1. This. 218 occurs. 5018 to be output (because the programmed speed is 0).c #1 (PCL): The first spindle (master axis in polygon synchronization) is clamped. the specified speed to be limited to the maximum speed. the P and Q values are not specified as a pair. or R value is specified. 5018 can be cleared by issuing a reset. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 471 NPQ PQE NSP SUO QCL PCL #0 to #3 →Cause of P/S alarm No.

the rotation ratio (specified P value) of the current master axis (first spindle) is displayed. The displayed values may vary from the actual values. DGN 474 Rotation ratio of the master axis in spindle polygon synchronization (specified P value) In spindle polygon synchronization mode. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 The specified synchronization mode status is displayed. w 62 .) If the RDGN bit (bit 5 of parameter 7603) is set to 1. the shift amount nt specified for the serial spindle (number of specified pulses. DGN 475 Rotation ratio of the slave axis in spindle polygon synchronization (specified Q value) om In spindle polygon synchronization mode. This diagnostic data indicates the actual speed of each spindle in ce synchronization mode. calculated at a rate of 4096 pulses per 360 degrees) is displayed. DGN 477 Actual speed of the master axis for spindle polygon synchronization (rpm) nc In spindle polygon synchronization mode. the actual speed of the slave axis (second spindle) is displayed. 476 Phase difference between two spindles in spindle polygon synchronization r. <Note> The values of DGN 477 and DGN 478 are displayed without being w sampled. the actual speed of the master axis (first spindle) is displayed. the rotation ratio (specified Q value) of the current slave axis (second axis) is displayed. Use these values for guidance only.(The units are the minimum input e increment for the rotation axis of the machine. .c DGN 478 Actual speed of the slave axis in spindle polygon synchronization (rpm) w In spindle polygon synchronization mode.c DGN (specified R value) In spindle polygon synchronization mode. the current phase difference (specified R value) is displayed.1.

1 : An alarm occurred at an odd–numbered address. #5(BNK) If bit 0 (PRA) is set to 1. 1 : Normal w #4 0 : Normal 1 : An NMI has occurred on the MMC board. 1 : Normal w #3(THH) 0 : The temperature of the MMC board is too high. 63 . DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI  State of remote buffer (protocol A) DGN 0500 Send command 1: SYN 2: RDY 3: RST 4: ALM 5: SAT 6: GTD 7: RTY 8: SDI DGN 0501 Receive command 1: SYN 2: RDY 3: ARS 4: AAL 5: CLB 6: SET 7: DAT 8: EOD om 9: WAT 10: RTY 11:RDI 12: SDO DGN 0502 State of remote buffer 0: Not ready 1: Reset state 2: Operation state r. w #2(THL) 0 : The temperature of the MMC board is too low. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 512 PA1 PA0 BNK THH THL PRA . #6 (PA0) If bit 0 (PRA) is set to 1. 0 : An alarm occurred in the lower half of shared RAM. #0(PRA) 1 : A RAM parity error occurred in shared RAM.c This data indicates the cause of a system alarm that has occurred in MMC–IV. 1 : An alarm occurred at an even–numbered address. #7 (PA1) If bit 0 (PRA) is set to 1.c 3: Alarm state 4: Circuit disconnection  Diagnostic data related e to MMC–IV #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 510 nt This data indicates the internal MMC–IV information (not available to ce general users). #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 511 This data indicates the internal MMC–IV information (not available to nc general users). 1 : An alarm occurred in the upper half of shared RAM.B–62445E/03 1.

. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 513 This data indicates the internal MMC–IV information.1. 0 : The MMC screen is selected. e DGN 521 Total number of retractions made by receiving the overload signal during cutting after G83 is specified 522 nt Executing the G83 command clears the value to zero.c w w w 64 . nc DGN 523 Difference between the position on the drill axis from which the previous retraction was started and the position from which the current retraction is started The units are the same as the minimum input increment.c DGN 520 Total number of retractions during cutting after G83 is specified Executing the G83 command clears the value to zero. #4 For the VIDEO signal. 1 : The CNC/PMC screen is selected. om  Diagnostic data related to a small–diameter peck drilling cycle (M series only) r. Position on the drill axis from which retraction is started ce DGN The units are the same as the minimum input increment.

M06 is specified in a block containing the command instructing reference position return. #0 (A43): A prohibited T code is specified after M06. 65 . r. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI  Diagnostic data related to ATC for FD Alpha #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 530 A99 A98 A97 A96 A95 A43 * Check the contents of this data if alarm 251 is output. machine lock was enabled for the Z–axis. While the tool was being changed. #3 (A97): M06 is specified in canned cycle mode. 7810) is set to 0. om M06 was specified before the first reference position return.c #2 (A96): The current tool number parameter (parameter No. e #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DGN 531 585 584 583 582 581 580 502 nt #6 (585): Spindle servo alarm (excessive error during ATC magazine indexing) #5 (584): Invalid sequence during positioning and ATC (system error) ce #4 (583): Spindle servo alarm (LSI overflow) #3 (582): Spindle servo alarm (excessive drift) #2 (581): Spindle servo alarm (excessive error during travel) nc #1 (580): Spindle servo alarm (excessive error in the stop state) #0 (502): Large spindle distribution (system error) . M06 is specified in tool compensation mode.c  Diagnostic data related to simple synchronous control w DGN 540 Difference between position errors of the master axis and slave axis under simple synchronous control w * M series only w The units are the same as the detection units. #5 (A99): A pry alarm occurred while the tool was being changed.B–62445E/03 1. #1 (A95): M06 is specified while the Z–axis machine coordinate is positive. #4 (A98): After the power was turned on or after an emergency stop was released.

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03  Diagnostic data related to the dual position feedback function 0550 Closed loop error [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Detection units [Valid data range] –99999999 to +99999999 om 0551 Semi–closed loop error [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Detection units r.c w w w 66 .c [Valid data range] –99999999 to +99999999 0552 Error between semi–closed and closed loops e [Data type] word axis [Unit of data] Detection units 0553 nt [Valid data range] –32768 to +32767 Amount of dual position compensation ce [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Detection units nc [Valid data range] –99999999 to +99999999 .

c w w w 67 . DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI The data items displayed on the diagnosis screen are obtained at the following positions: Semi–closed loop error (No. 2080) .c Closed loop error (Parameters No. + control - Servo amplifier Ps Conversion coefficients r. 550) Amount of dual + position compensa- Time tion (No. + e Σ (Parameter No. + Pf nt Error between semi– closed and closed loops (No. 55) ce nc . 553) constant + . 2078 and 2079) (No.B–62445E/03 1. 551) Motor Command + + + Σ Kp Speed Machine om .

c MEM STRT MTN *** ALM/BAT (Alarm state/ Low battery) FIN (Waiting for auxiliary e funciton finish) MTN/DWL( Axis travelling/dwelling) nt – –EMG– –/–RESET–(Emergency stop/reset state) STRT/STOP/HOLD/INC (Start/Stop/Hold state) ce Mode display EDIT/MEM/RMT/MDI/INC HND/JOG/REF/THND/TJOG EDIT: Edit mode nc MEM: Memory mode RMT: Remote operation mode MDI: MDI operation mode INC: Incremental feed mode (Without manual pulse generator) .1.940 Y 363.F 3000MM/M S 0 T0000 MEM STRT MTN *** 09:06:35 [ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ] r.c HND: Handle feed mode JOG: Jog feed mode REF: Reference position return mode w THND: TEACH IN NANDLE mode TJOG: TEACH IN JOG mode w w 68 .233 Z 0.000 PART COUNT 5 om RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S ACT.9 NC STATE DISPLAY ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) O1000 N00010 X 217. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 1.

The start of data sampling can be triggered by the rising or falling edge of a machine signal. however. and thermal simulation data for the servo motor of each axis b. 1 : Displays servo waveform (usual graphic display function cannot be used. speed. and ce thermal simulation data for the servo motor for each axis Notes 1 To output stored waveform data. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI 1. .1 (1) Set a parameter to utilize the servo waveform diagnostic function.c w 1. Error.c (2) Storage type The storage type waveform diagnosis function enables the storing of any variation in the data items listed below and. Stored data can be output via the reader/punch interface. torque. current.B–62445E/03 1. torque. Setting Parameters w #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3112 SGD w #0(SGD) 0 : Do not display servo waveform (usual graphic display). This function facilitates the adjustment of the servo and spindle motors. Composite speed for the first.10 Tuning becomes easier by graphically displaying servo error amount and torque command. speed. The e end of data sampling can be triggered by the rising or falling edge of a machine signal. that a graphics board is necessary to display waveforms. pulse distribution amount. (Graphic option is required). pulse distribution amount. the optional reader/punch nc interface must have been installed. and third axes c. om a. as a waveform. current. This function facilitates the estimation of nt erroneous locations. the graphical display (as a waveform) of the stored data.10. Spindle motor speed and load meter value d. Note. etc. 2 The waveform diagnosis function is enabled when bit 0 (SGD) of parameter No. On/off state of a machine signal specified with a signal address r. WAVE FORM DIAGNOSTIC The following two types of waveform diagnosis functions are supported: FUNCTION (1) One–shot type The one–shot type waveform diagnosis function can graphically display. 3120 Time between servo alarm and sampling stop (storage type) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 1 to 32760 69 . (2) Turn off the power once and turn it on again. a. Error. any variation in those data items listed below. 3112 is set to 1. if a servo alarm occurs. second.

3. 2 : Starts data sampling upon the detection of the first falling edge of the w trigger signal after the [START] key is pressed. then the parameter screen for the waveform diagnosis is displayed. samples data for the specified period. Valid data range: 10 to 32760 Units: ms (3) Trigger: Set the PMC address and bit for the signal used to trigger the start of data sampling.MEM ] [ ] [ ] . samples data for the specified period.PRM] [W. when 1 or 2 is set for the start condition.c  Waveform diagnosis (1) Display start condition parameters (one–shot 0 : Starts data sampling upon the [START] key being pressed. then press . the frame on the right side of the screen displays help information for that data to which the cursor is positioned. then draws a waveform.10. WAVE DIAGNOSE (PARAMETER) O1234 N12345 e GRP CONDITION 100 GRP CONDITION nt SAMPLING TIME *****MS TRIGGER ******* (ONE–S TYPE) 0:START 1:START&TRG ↑ 2:START&TRG ↓ ce (CH–1) (CH–2) (MEMORY TYPE) 100: DATA OF DATA NO. Waveform Diagnostic Parameter Screen 2.2: ST signal 70 . Example) G0007. Press the SYSTEM key to display a system screen such as aparameter. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 1. enter the corresponding data. samples w type) data for the specified period. Press the next menu key several times. Data items for which om INPUT ***** is displayed cannot be set. Set the necessary data items. then draws a waveform.2 1. Press [W. To assist in data setting.DGNS] is displayed. Position the cursor to the item to be set. then draws a waveform. 11 22 MEMORY UNIT 1000 10 1/3 SIGNAL ******* ******* nc > S 0 T0000 EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52 [W.DGNS].c the page keys and .GRPH] [ W. Help information which cannot fit into a single frame is split into several pages. which the user can scroll through using r. 1 : Starts data sampling upon the detection of the first rising edge of the w trigger signal after the [START] key is pressed.1. (2) Sampling period: Set the period during which data will be sampled. and the soft key [W.

001 (6) Signal address: PMC address and bit number.B–62445E/03 1. second. Set in the same way as that for trigger. and Pulses nt99 third axes (input increments) On/off state of a machine signal specified with None a signal address ce 10n Actual spindle speed for the n–th axis % (relative to maximum rotation speed) nc 11n Load meter for the spindle for the n–th axis % (relative to maximum output) (5) Data units: Weight of data when 1 is specified. Data No. when the data number is 99. Description Units 00 Does not display a waveform.c 5n Actual speed for the n–th axis RPM 6n Command current for the n–th axis % (relative to maximum current) 7n Thermal simulation data for the n–th axis % (OVC alarm ra- e tio) 90 Composite speed for the first. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI (4) Data number: The table below lists the numbers of the data items for which a waveform can be displayed (n = 1 to 8). – 0n Servo error (8 ms) for the n–th axis (positional Pulses deviation) (detection units) 1n Pulse distribution for the n–th axis Pulses (move command) (input increments) om 2n Torque for the n–th axis (actual current) % (relative to maximum current) 3n Servo error (2 ms) for the n–th axis (positional Pulses deviation) (detection units) r. w w 71 . The data units are automatically specified for each data item and need not be set unless . [Valid data range] 1 to 1000 w [Unit] 0.c the units must be changed for some reason.

Numbers for which no data is stored cannot be specified. type) (2) Sampling period: Invalid (3) Trigger: Invalid (4) Data number: The table below lists the numbers of the data items for which a waveform can be displayed (n = 1 to 8). Description Units om 00 Does not display a waveform. The data units are automatically specified for each data item and need not be set unless the units must be changed for some reason.001 (6) Signal address: Invalid .c w w w 72 . Data No.c 2n Torque for the n–th axis (actual current) % (relative to maximum current) 5n Actual speed for the n–th axis RPM e 6n Command current for the n–th axis % (relative to maximum current) nt7n Thermal simulation data for the n–th axis % (OVC alarm ra- tio) ce (5) Data units: Weight of data when 1 is specified.1. [Valid data range] 1 to 1000 nc [Unit] 0. – 0n Servo error (8 ms) for the n–th axis (positional Pulses deviation) (detection units) 1n Pulse distribution for the n–th axis (move com.Pulses mand) (input increments) r. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03  Waveform diagnosis (1) Display start condition parameters (storage 100 : Draws a waveform for the stored data.

is not stored and thus cannot be output later. The following three sets of soft keys are displayed by the key. (GRAPHIC) screen. 0 0 r.B–62445E/03 1.0 0.5 0 0 om –0. data is sampled when the specified start condition is satisfied. then the following soft keys are displayed. While sampling is being performed. SAMPLING blinks at the top of the screen. Press soft key [(OPRT)]. e nt [START] [TIME³] [²TIME] [H–DOBL] [H–DOBL] [START] [CH–1°] [CH–1±] [V–DOBL] [V–HALF] ce [START] [CH–2°] [CH–2±] [V–DOBL] [V–HALF] 1 [START ] :Starts Graphic data 2 [TIME→] :Shift the waveform of channel 1 and 2 rightward 3 [←TIME] : Shift the waveform of channel and 2 leftward nc 4 [H–DOBL] :Double the time scale of the waveform of channel 1 and 2 5 [H–HALF] :Half the time scale of the waveform of channel 1 and 2 .10. then graph of waveform diagnosis is Graphic of Wave displayed.GRPH]. press the [START] key on the WAVE DIAGNOS. To sample data for one–shot type waveform diagnosis. 5 5 –1.c 6 [H–DOBL] :Double the height of waveform of channel 1 and 2 7 [V–HALF] :Half the height of waveform of channel 1 and 2 w 8 [CH–1↑] : Shift the zero point of channel 1 upward 9 [CH–1↓] : Shift the zero point of channel 1 downward 10 [CH–2↑] : Shift the zero point of channel 2 upward w 11 [CH–2↓] : Shift the zero point of channel 2 downward  Drawing a waveform for The one–shot type waveform diagnosis function draws a waveform for a w one–shot type waveform specified data item in real time as the data is sampled. diagnosis however. –1.c [START] [TIME³] [²TIME] [H–DOBL] [H–HALF] 2. a waveform is automatically displayed. Diagnosis data WAVE DIAGNOSE (GRAPHIC) CH1 CH2 1. Data sampling continues for the specified period. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI 1.3 1. Once data sampling has been completed. 73 .5 0. Then.0 1. Pressing the [SATART] soft key starts data sampling. –0. The sampled data. Press soft key [W.

The next page explains sampling in detail. (MOMORY) screen indicates whether data is being stored. e Pressing the [START] soft key loads stored data.c w w EDIT **** ****** w [START] [TIME³] [²TIME] [H–DOBL] [H–HALF] 74 . nc WAVE DIAGNOS. Once the data has nt been loaded. set 100 for the display start storage type waveform condition. (GRAPHIC) O1234 N12345 CH1 CH2 om EDIT **** ****** [START] [TIME³] [²TIME] [H–DOBL] [H–HALF] r. While the data is being loaded. If the [START] soft key is pressed while data is being stored. The maximum data width for storage type waveform diagnosis diagnosis is 32760 ms. (GRAPHIC) O1234 N12345 CH193/01/13 12:15:00 CH2 .c  Drawing a waveform for To use storage type waveform diagnosis. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 WAVE DIAGNOS. Data must be sampled before starting drawing. The date on which the data was stored is displayed at the top left of the screen. The WAVE DIAGNOS. SAMPLING blinks at the top of the screen. storage is stopped and the waveform ce for the data stored up to that point is displayed. a waveform is displayed.1.

(PARAMETER) screen. The axis names are displayed to the right of the data items. Press this soft key to display the storage type waveform WAVE DIAGNOS.4 (1) Press the SYSTEM function key.10. enter the names of w the axes for which data will be sampled for that data item.PRM] [W. diagnosis (2) Press the [W.4 DATA KINDS SAMPLING AXIS POS ERROR XYZABCUV r. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI 1. set the necessary data items. 1. The configuration of the operation selection soft keys is as follows: om WAVE DIAGNOS. Example) XYZ + [SELECT] or INPUT Once the sampling axes have been selected.MEM] soft key to display the WAVE DIAGNOS.10. The operation selection soft keys appear.MEM ] [ ] [ ] nc Press [SELECT] [ ] [ ] [ ] [START] .4 Soft keys w (4) Using the cursor. the sampling period for each axis is displayed.c MOTION CMD XYZABCUV CURRENT (%) XYZABCUV SPEED (RPM) NONE TORQUE CMD NONE HEAT SIMLT XYZABCUV e SMPL TIME : 2. 75 .GRPH] [ W. To set the sampling axes. then press [SELECT] or INPUT . Subsequently pressing the [START] soft key starts data sampling. (MEMORY) O1234 N12345 CONDITION: 100 TRIGGER: G0123. 0SEC DATE : MEMORY nt EDIT **** *** *** [SELECT] [ ] [ 08:20:52 ] [ ] [START] ce (3) The configuration of the operation selection soft keys is as follows: [W. (MEMORY) screen.c [ ] [ ] [PUNCH] [ ] [ ] w Fig. position the cursor to the data item to be set.DGNS] soft key. Pressing the menu continuation key [ Data sampling for ] displays the [W.B–62445E/03 1.

2: ST signal (3) Data type: The following table lists the types of data for which a nc waveform can be displayed.c (detection units) MOTION CMD Pulse distribution for the n–th axis Pulses (input increments) w CURRENT (%) Torque for the n–th axis % (relative to maximum current) w SPEED (RPM) Actual speed for the n–th axis RPM TORQUE CMD Command current for the n–th axis % (relative to w maximum current) HEAT SIMLT Thermal simulation data for the n–th % axis (OVC alarm ratio) (4) Sampling axis: The axes along which data will be sampled are displayed. MEMORY blinks in this field. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 Notes 1 Data items for which ***** is displayed cannot be set. (5) Sampling period: The sampling period for each axis is displayed. In this case. starting nt with the oldest data. Pressing the [SLELCT] soft key without entering an axis name results in no sampling axis being set. after the issue of a servo alarm. r. (6) Date of storage: While data is being sampled. ce (2) Trigger: Set the PMC address and bit for the signal used to trigger the stopping of data storage. Example) G0007. 3120 can be used to delay data storage being stopped by a specified period (ms).c 101: Stops data storage upon the issue of a servo alarm or the detection of the rising edge of the trigger signal. 2 To change the sampling axes. enter new axis names then press the [SELECT] soft key. 76 . the date at that point appears in this field. When data sampling stops. data sampling is stopped. when 101 or 102 is set for the stop condition. data is overwritten. om 4 Initially. e The maximum stored data width is 32760 ms. Data type Description Units POS ERROR Servo error (8 ms) for the n–th axis Pulses .  Storage data parameters (1) Storage stop condition 100: Stops data storage upon the issue of a servo alarm. press the [START] soft key to restart data sampling for the new sampling axes. no sampling axis is set.1. Parameter No. If the storage stop condition is not satisfied within 32760 ms. 3 If the sampling axes are changed during data sampling. 102: Stops data storage upon the issue of a servo alarm or the detection of the falling edge of the trigger signal.

(storage type) 2 Press the SYSTEM key. [PUNCH]. P/S alarm 86 is issued. The procedure for deleting a file is described later. If a file named WAVE DIAGNOS already exists in the floppy disk or on the card. to which the number of the last file is assigned. [PUNCH]. The waveform diagnosis data is output to a file named WAVE DIAGNOS. w 4 Press the [W. 2 Press the SYSTEM key.” below. (MEMORY) screen. then display the WAVE DIAGNOS.c Press  Output to FANUC Floppy w Cassette or FA Card 1 Select EDIT mode.0SEC : 93/01/13 12:15:00 12:15:52 ce [SELECT] [ ] [ ] [ ] [START] [ ] [ ] [PUNCH] [ ] [ ] nc Press [ ] [ ] [ ] [ CAN ] [ EXEC ] . 3 Press the [W. 3 Open the write protect tab on the floppy disk or card. 77 . then display the WAVE DIAGNOS. and [EXEC] soft keys. (MEMORY) w screen. as follows: diagnosis data 1 Select EDIT mode. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI 1. see “Output to FANUC Floppy Cassette or FA Card.B–62445E/03 1.MEM]. in this order. A floppy disk or card can contain only one file for waveform diagnosis data.10. .5 Waveform diagnosis data of servo alarm format can be output to an I/O Outputting waveform device.4 r. If the existing WAVE DIAGNOS file contains unnecessary waveform diagnosis data of servo alarm format. and [EXEC] soft keys. WAVE DIAGNOSE (MEMORY) O1234 N12345 CONDIGION: 100 TRIGGER: G0123. om For details of input/output to/from the FANUC Floppy Cassette or FA Card. . delete that file before attempting to output new data.MEM]. in this order.c DATA KINDS SAMPLING AXIS POS ERROR XYZABCUV MOTION CMD XYZABCUV CURRENT (%) XYZABCUV e SPEED (RPM) NONE TORQUE CMD NONE HEAT SIMLT XYZABCUV nt EDIT **** *** *** SMPL DATE TIME : 2.

.*: Data Example: 12:14 59 seconds on June 23. *: Axis number (1 to 8) w w 78 . 1 2 1 4 5 9 . * * * * D *.. Data items are identified by nine identifier words.c P2: Move command P3: Command current w P4: Actual current P5: Thermal simulation D*. ce T 6 9 D 1 9 9 2 0 6 2 3 . T(identifier word) T0 : Header T60 : Positional deviation T61 : Move command T62 : Actual current T63 : Actual speed om T64 : Command current T65 : Thermal simulation T68 : Selected axes T69 : Date and time r. selected axes. and waveform diagnosis data are output in this order.  * * . 3 Selected axes nc T 6 8 P * * D * * . the header. 1992 * * . * * .1. Output data other than the identifier words varies with the data type. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03  Output format In the servo alarm format. P0: Positional deviation P1: Actual speed .c 1 Header T 0 C W A V E D I A G N O S . C: Data word e 2 Data word T 6 9 D * nt * * * * * . date and time.

* * . T 6 2 D * * . nt ce nc . * * .  * * . T 6 3 D * * .  * * . * * . * * . DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI 4 Waveform diagnosis data T 6 0 D * * .c Note No identifier word is output for a data item for which no axis is selected. D *. * * . T 6 1 D * * .. e The above file corresponds to a paper tape of about 200 m in length. * * . * * . om T 6 4 D * * . T 6 5 D * * . * * .  * * .  * * .c w w w 79 .  * * . * * . * * . * * .*: Waveform diagnosis data x number of axes r. * * .B–62445E/03 1.  * * .

2 The bar graph for the speed meter shows the ratio of the current spindle speed to the maximum spindle speed (100%). Press the POS key to display the position display screen. Press continuous menu key . l 1 : Operating monitor is displayed. 4. (OPS) of parameter 311 to 1.c 2. the load meter of the basic axes are displayed.1 1.11 Load meter of the servo axis and the serial spindle and the speed meter can be displayed. then soft key [MONI] is displayed.F 3000 MM/M . If parameters 3151 to 3153 are all zero. r. Display Method #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 om 3111 OPM #5:(OPM) 0 : Operating monitor is not displayed. Although the speed meter normally indicates the speed of the w spindle motor.1.11. 3151 to 3. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 1. 4 For 10” LCD/14” CRT.c MEM STRT MTN *** 09:06:35 [ [ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ] w Notes w 1 The bar graph for the load meter shows load up to 200%. then the operating monitor screen is e displayed. it can also be used to indicate the speed of the spindle by setting bit 6153. 3 The servo axes for their load meters are displayed are set to parameter No. Press the soft key [MONI]. Set a parameter to display operating monitor. nt OPERATING MONITOR (LOAD METER) O0001 N00001 ce X : * * * 80% S1: 201% Y : * * * * * 0% (SPEED METER RPM) Z : * * * * * 0% S1: * * * 1500 nc PART COUNT 5 RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S ACT. the bar of the load meter that exceed 100% shows purple color. OPERATING MONITOR 1. 3. 80 .

DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI (1) Associated Parameters 3151 Axis number for which the 1st load meter for servo motor is displayed 3152 Axis number for which the 2nd load meter for servo motor is displayed 3153 Axis number for which the 3rd load meter for servo motor is displayed om e r.c nt ce nc .c w w w 81 .B–62445E/03 1.

1. Parameter no. Setting no.12 LIST OF OPERATIONS Reset Data Param.→[ " ]→[F SRH]→[EXEC] Deleting a file OFF EDIT PROG <N>→File no.c Resetting OT alarm At Pow.→[NO. Func- prote Function eter Mode tion Operation ction write=1 button key Heading a file EDIT PROG <N>→File no. OFF keep relay) POS→ <POS>(Display of relative coordinate)<AXIS>→[ORIGIN] Tool length mea- JOG OFF.Stop [PMCPRM]→[TIMER] or [KEEPRL]→Data→<INPUT> (PMC) w rameters (Timer.SRH]→<AXIS>→[INP. Func- prote om Function eter Mode tion Operation ction write=1 button key Resetting run hour – POS [(OPRT)] [RUNPRE]→[EXEC] Resetting no.C] w Input/Output with FANUC Cassette Data Param. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 1.→[NO.c rameters. →<OFFSET>→Jog the tool to measuring position w surement SET Offset no. OFF. Offset number→[NO. [PMCPRM]→[COUNTR] or [DATA]→Data→<INPUT> . E.SRH]→Offset value→<INPUT> OFF – ues SET Inputting setting SET.SRH]→Data→<INPUT> → PWE =0 MDI or TEM →<RESET> Inputting parameters Yes E. <P> and <CAN> – er ON Resetting alarm 100 – – <CAN> and <RESET> e Registration from MDI Function Data prote ction key Param- eter write=1 nt Mode Func- tion button Operation ce SYS. of ma.Stop (PA- RAM) nc Inputting offset val.→[ " ]→[DELETE→[EXEC] Collating a program EDIT PROG Heading a file→<O>→Program number→[(OPRT)] →[ " ]→[READ]→[EXEC] 82 .SRH]Data→<INPUT> OFF MDI data TING Input of PMC pa. [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE]→[EXEC] – POS chined parts r. counter OFF and data table SYS- MDI or TEM Inputting PMC pa.→[NO.

)→[(OPRT)]→[ " ]→[READ]→[EXEC] ues SET Registering a pro.<INPUT>→[EXEC] Inputting offset val. <O>→Program no.c Output of all pro.→[ " ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC] EDIT PROG gram w Output of macro OFF. <O>→–9999→[ EDIT PROG grams Output of one pro. OFF EDIT OFF. OFF EDIT PROG <N>→File no.c Inputting macro vari. [(OPRT)]→[ " ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC] Output of offset EDIT SET " ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC] .→<INPUT>→[ " ]→<O>→Program no. [ " ]→[I/O]→(CANNEL NO)<1> <INPUT>→(DEVICE nc Output of PMC pa- EDIT TEM NAME) [FDCAS] →(KIND OF DATA) [PARAM] → [WRITE] rameter (PMC) → (FILE NO) <–> <1> <INPUT>→[EXEC] OFF. [(OPRT)]→[ " ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC] TEM Output of parameter EDIT (PA- RAM) SYS. OFF EDIT PROG ables [READ]→[EXEC] MEMO PROG <START> RY e Output to FANUC Cassette Function Data prote ction key Param- eter write=1 nt Mode Func- tion button Operation ce SYS.Stop SYS.B–62445E/03 1.Stop TEM (PA- RAM) Inputting PMC pa. → r. (Heading a file no. [ " ]→[I/O]→(CANNEL NO)<1> <INPUT>→(DEVICE rameters TEM NAME) [FDCAS]→(KIND OF DATA) [PA- om (PMC) RAM]→[READ]→(FILE NO) File no. Func- prote Function eter Mode tion Operation ction write=1 button key Inputting parameters OFF EDIT or SYS. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI Inputting From FANUC Cassette Data Param. [(OPRT)]→[ " ]→[READ]→[EXEC] E. OFF E.→<INPUT>→[ " ]→[READ]→[EXEC] gram <N>→File no. [ " ]→[MACRO]→[(OPRT)]→[ " ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC] EDIT variables SET w w 83 .

Data to be searched→[SRH↑] or[SRH↓] or <↑> <↓> EDIT PROG dress word (cursor key) Searching an ad. SYS.→<DELETE> Deleting several <N>→Sequence no. Func- prote Function eter Mode tion Operation ction write=1 button key Searching a pro. Address to be searched [SRH↑] or[SRH↓] or <↑> <↓> EDIT PROG dress only (Cursor key) Searching an offset OFF. Diagnostic number→[NO.→[O SRH] gram number RY PROG or EDIT Searching a se. OFF <O>→–9999→<DELETE> .1. Offset no. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 Search Data Param.→[NO. MEMO Program no.→[NO. MEMO <O>→Program no.SRH] e eter number TEM – (PA- nt RAM) ce Edit Data Param. SYS. Func- prote Function eter Mode tion Operation nc ction write=1 button key Display of memory [LIB] EDIT PROG capacity used Deleting all pro. Parameter no.SRH] nostic number TEM – (DGNO S) Searching a param.SRH] – number SET r. search→<N>→Sequence number→[NSRH] PROG quence number RY om Searching an ad. Func- prote Function eter Mode tion Operation ction write=1 button key Collating memory ON EDIT PROG [(OPRT)]→[ " ]→[READ]→[EXEC] 84 .) Deleting a block OFF EDIT PROG <EOB>→<DELETE> Deleting a word OFF EDIT PROG Searching a word to be deleted→<DELETE> w Changing a word OFF EDIT PROG Searching a word to be changed→New Data→<ALTER > OFF Searching a word immediately before a word to be Inserting a word EDIT PROG searched→New Data→<INSERT> w Collation Data Param.c EDIT PROG grams Deleting a program OFF EDIT PROG <O>→Program no.→<DELETE> w OFF EDIT PROG blocks (Deleted up to a block with a specified sequence no.c Searching a diag.

c PMC RAM (Note1) At Main CPU : <X>AND<0> (O) Power ON Loader is controlled : <X>AND<5> w Additional SRAM M/T : <O> (O) AND<DELETE> area clear At Power On 2path are controlled Path1 : <O> (O) AND<1> w ON Path2 : <O> (O) AND<2> w Note If a PMC ladder program is stored in FROM. Func- prote Function eter Mode tion Operation ction write=1 button key TEACH Jog the machine→<X>.c Memory all clear M/T : <RESET>AND<DELETE> On 2path are controlled At On 2path are controlled power Path1 : <CAN>AND<1> ON Path2 : <CAN>AND<2> e Loader is controlled : <CAN>AND<5> Parameter/offset M/T : <RESET> clear f nt A At Power ON On 2path are controlled Path1 Path2 : <RESET>AND<1> : <RESET>AND<2> ce Loader is controlled : <RESET>AND<5> (Parameter only) Clearing a program M/T : <DELETE> At A On 2path are controlled f Power Path1 : <DELETE>AND<1> nc ON Path2 : <DELETE>AND<2> Loader is controlled : <RESET>AND<5> Program under edi.<Y> or <Z>→<INSERT> –IN → NC data → <INSERT> → <EOB> → <INSERT> Input of NC data JOG/ PROG HAN- DLE om Clear Data Param. Func- prote- Function eter Mode tion Operation ction write=1 key key r. 85 . the ladder area in DRAM is cleared. If a PMC ladder program is not stored in FROM.B–62445E/03 1. loading into DRAM is not performed. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI Playback Data Param. <PROG>AND<RESET> tion at power – off(PS101) .

WARNING YOU SET THE PARAMETER NO.13 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN AN OPTION IS CHANGED  Warning screen This CNC displays a warning screen when the configuration of the options using the SRAM area is changed. the system software may require more SRAM than is currently installed in the system. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 1.9921#2 r. w FILE ALLOCATION ERROR w S–RAM CAPACITY IS NOT SUFFICIENT. w PLEASE PRESS <CAN> KEY : RETURN TO THE STATE BEFORE OPTION PARAMETER IS CHANGED. Two or more nc function names may be displayed. an allocation error screen appears the first time the system is turned on after the addition of the option. *1 86 . ADDITIONAL S–RAM IS NECESSARY.  Allocation error screen When an option which uses the SRAM area is added. thus restoring the state existing before the addition. In this . * PART PROGRAM MEMORY PLEASE PRESS <DELETE> OR <CAN> KEY. The data for the function indicated on the screen is cleared the next time the system is turned om on. <DELETE> : CLEAR ALL DATA e *1 <CAN> : CANCEL nt ce Note This line varies with the parameter settings.c THE FOLLOWING DATA WILL BE CLEARED.1.c case.

c nt ce nc .B–62445E/03 1. additional SRAM can be mounted. e r. Operation:When turning on the power. DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI Note When the currently installed SRAM is not sufficient.c w w w 87 . hold down the following keys: <O>+<DELETE> for M/T series <O>+<1> for two–path control (Main) <O>+<2> for two–path control (Sub) om When installing additional SRAM. however. Newly installed SRAM must be cleared before it can be used. perform all clear.

perform memory all clear (by holding down the RESET and ce DELETE MDI keys then turning on the power) or reinstall the original system software.c SYSTEM LABEL CHECK ERROR: CLEAR ALL SRAM MODULE NOT READY e nt In this case.c w w w 88 . DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF CRT/MDI B–62445E/03 1. the following screen will be displayed and the system will not DISPLAYED WHEN be activated: SYSTEM SOFTWARE IS REPLACED (SYSTEM LABEL CHECK ERROR) om BOA1–01 r. nc . the first time the CNC is turned on after the system software WARNING SCREEN is replaced. Otherwise.1.14 System software can be replaced only with compatible system software.

. . .3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . 126 2. 182 w w w 89 . . . . .10 FUSE REPLACEMENT IN POWER ce SUPPLY UNIT .9 HOW TO REPLACE THE MOTORS . . 172 nt 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .c 2. . . . . . . . . 91 2. . . . . . connection of units and the functions of PCBs and modules mounted on PCBs. . . . . . .c 2. . . . .2 GENERAL OF HARDWARE . 181 . . . . . . . . . . . .8 HOW TO REPLACE THE BATTERIES . . .12 HOW TO REPLACE THE COLOR LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY . . . 175 2. . om 2. . . . .1 STRUCTURE . . . . . . . .B–62445E/03 2.7 HOW TO REPLACE THE MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 REPLACING THE LCD BACKLIGHT .4 NTER–MACHINE CONNECTION . . . . . . 99 r. . . . . . . . . . . . .5 LED DISPLAY AND MODULE CONFIGURATION OF PCB . . . . . 92 2. . . . . . . . . . 177 nc 2.13 REPLACING THE LCD FUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 e 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 2.6 LIST THE OF PCBS AND UNITS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HARDWARE 2 HARDWARE This chapter describes structure of CNC control section. . . . . .11 MAINTENANCE OF HEAT PIPE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . 180 2. . . . 90 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 2. . . . . . . . . . . . .

c SERVOMOTOR nt SERVO AMP C series SERVO AMP ce nc I/O Unit MODEL – A I/O LINK .456 Z 456. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 2.2.789 e r.1 STRUCTURE Control unit (4 slots) CRT/MDI unit OP2 OP1 MAIN PSU om Series 16 ON 01234N1234 OFF X 123.c AIF01A w ↑ ↓ w Machine side operator’s panel magnetics circuit w 90 .

c CPU Power supply w w 2 slots 3 slots w 4 slots 6 slots 8 slots 91 . MPG(x3) DI DNC2) RS–232–C Analog I/O (x2) e Graphic control funtion nt ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ OPTION BASIC SYSTEM ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ce ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ nc MAIN .c (PMC–RC3) control tion function PMC–RBS supply unit Spindle (x2) (Remote I/O LINK AI/BI I/O LINK High speed buffer.2 GENERAL OF HARDWARE 2. CNC CPU RISC Back MCC Loader DI/DO CAP CPU trol 4–axis On/Off CPU graund function control 40/ 40 (CAP II) (CAP–II) control control drawing function 80/ 56 Spindle(x2) function 104/ 72 CRT/MDI PMC CPU 4–axis Communica- 156/120 Power r.1 Series 16 Back Loader MCC Option 3 Option 2 Option 1 Main CPU Power om RISC ground control I/O card board drawing Board board board board board supply unit board board SUB CPU Graphic con. DNC1.B–62445E/03 2.2. HARDWARE 2.

c w w w 92 .c nt ce nc .2.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM om e r. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 2.

160–TB/MB (MAIN–A SPEC.B–62445E/03 2.c CRT (JA1) From MDI (JA2) Option board 1 for CAP II R232–1(JD5A) MMC board for MMC Punch panel Tape reader e R232–2(JD5B) MPG 3 MPG(JA3) nt CPD1 CPD1 JD1B Operators panel in- terface JD1B JD1A CP32 I/O Unit–A ce IOLINK(JD1A) JA1A (Option 3 for PMC–RC) A–OUT1(JA8A) nc Analog voltage output Braker AC200V AC reactor MCC Braker AC200V Control motor amp.c α series PSM CX4 CX1B TB1 CX2B JX1B Emergency stop w CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A JY2 PC SPDL–1(JA7A) JA7B SPM w Absolute Spindle TB2 PC battery motor TB1 CX2B JX1B w APCBAT(JA4A) 6V TB1 CX2A JX1A AMP1(JV1) JA1B SVM TB2 (TYPE–A I/F) Servo ENC1(JF1) PC motor 1st axis or 1st axis in 1st path SCALE1(JF21) Linear scale 93 . PDP AC200V om (CP3) ON/OFF (CP4) ON/OFF +24V (CP5) CN2 CRT/MDI +24E (CP6) For monochro.1 16–TB/MB. CRT.3. CX1A TB2 CX3 ÅÅ . HARDWARE 2. LCD CN1 unit DC24V CK1 Main CPU r.) Power unit AC–IN (CP1) AC200XAC240V AC–OUT (CP2) For color CRT.

c IOLINK(JD1A) interface unit. etc.2.c HDI(JA5) High speed DI SPDL–2(JA7B) Control motor amp α series SPM e APCBAT(JA4B) 6V Absolute pulse coder battery AMP5(JV5) 5th axis servo amp/Serial PC/ Linear scale ENC5(JF5) SCALE5(JF25) AMP6(JV6) nt or 1st axis servo amp /Serial PC/ Linear scale in 2nd path 6th axis servo amp/Serial PC/ Linear scale ce ENC6(JF6) or SCALE6(JF26) 2nd axis servo amp /Serial PC/ Linear scale in 2nd path AMP7(JV7) 7th axis servo amp/Serial PC/ Linear scale ENC7(JF7) or SCALE7(JF27) 3rd axis servo amp /Serial PC/ Linear scale in 2nd path nc AMP8(JV8) 8th axis servo amp/Serial PC/ Linear scale ENC8(JF8) or SCALE8(JF28) 4th axis servo amp /Serial PC/ Linear scale in 2nd path Option 3 board To I/O unit. (for PMC–RC) I/O card DO–1(C54) w DO–2(C55) DO–3(C56) Operator‘s panel DI–1(C50) Magnetics cabinet w DI–2(C51) DI–3(C52) DI–4(C53) DI–5(C56) w DI–6(C57) 94 . HARDWARE B–62445E/03 (Main CPU) AMP2(JV2) 2nd axis servo amp/Serial PC/ Linear scale ENC2(JF2) or 2nd axis servo amp /Serial PC/ Linear scale in 1st path SCALE2(JF22) AMP3(JV3) 3rd axis servo amp/Serial PC/ Linear scale ENC3(JF3) or SCALE3(JF23) 3rd axis servo amp /Serial PC/ Linear scale in 1st path AMP4(JV4) 4th axis servo amp/Serial PC/ Linear scale ENC4(JF4) or SCALE4(JF24) 4th axis servo amp /Serial PC/ Linear scale in 1st path Option 1 board om CRT(JA1) To CRT (with CAP II) R422–1(JD6A) Remote buffer /DNC 1 R232–3(JD5C) Remote buffer Option 2 board A–OUT2(JA8B) Analog voltage output AIN(JA6) Analog I/O r. Operator‘s panel .

HARDWARE 2. CRT.c α series PSM CX4 CX1B TB1 CX2B JX1B Emergency stop w CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A JY2 PC SPDL–1(JA7A) JA7B SPM w Absolute Spindle TB2 PC battery motor TB1 CX2B JX1B w APCBAT(JA4A) 6V TB1 CX2A JX1A AMP1(JV1) JA1B SVM TB2 (TYPE–A I/F) Servo ENC1(JF1) PC motor 1st axis or 1st axis in 1st path SCALE1(JF21) Linear scale 95 . 18–TB/MB. 180–TB/MB (MAIN–B SPEC.) Power unit AC–IN (CP1) AC200XAC240V AC–OUT (CP2) For color CRT.2 16–TB/MB. CX1A TB2 CX3 ÅÅ .B–62445E/03 2. PDP AC200V om (CP3) ON/OFF (CP4) ON/OFF +24V (CP5) CN2 CRT/MDI +24E (CP6) For monochro. LCD CN1 unit DC24V CK1 Main CPU r.c CRT (JA1) From MDI (JA2) Option board 1 for CAP II R232–1(JD5A) MMC board for MMC Punch panel Tape reader e R232–2(JD5B) MPG 3 MPG(JA3) nt CPD1 CPD1 JD1B Operators panel in- terface JD1B JD1A CP32 I/O Unit–A ce IOLINK(JD1A) JA1A (Option 3 for PMC–RC) A–OUT1(JA8A) nc Analog voltage output Braker AC200V AC reactor MCC Braker AC200V Control motor amp.3. 160–TB/MB.

c IOLINK (JD1A) interface unit. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 (Main CPU) SERV02(JS2A) 2nd axis servo amp/Linear scale or SCALE2(JF22) 2nd axis servo amp/Linear scale in 1st path SERV03(JS3A) 3nd axis servo amp/Linear scale or 3nd axis servo amp/Linear scale in 1st path SCALE3(JF23) SERV04(JS4A) 4th axis servo amp/Linear scale or SCALE4(JF24) 4th axis servo amp/Linear scale in 1st path SERV05(JS5A) 5th axis servo amp or 5th axis servo amp in 1st path SERV06(JS6A) 6th axis servo amp or 5th axis servo amp in 1st path SV–CHK(JA26) Connector for 5th and 6th servo check om Option 1 board CRT(JA1) To CRT (with CAP II) R422–1(JD6A) Remote buffer /DNC 1 R232–3(JD5C) Remote buffer Option 2 board Analog voltage output A–OUT2(JA8B) Analog I/O r. Operator‘s panel .c AIN(JA6) High speed DI HDI(JA5) SPDL–2(JA7B) Control motor amp α series SPM e APCBAT(JA4A)  Absolute pulse coder battery AMP1(JS1A–2) SCALE1(JF21–2) AMP2(JS2A–2) nt 7th axis servo amp/Linear scale or 1st axis servo amp/Linear scale in 2nd path 8th axis servo amp/Linear scale or 2st axis servo amp/Linear scale in 2nd path ce SCALE2(JF22–2) AMP3(JS3A–2) 3rd axis servo amp/Linear scale in 2nd path SCALE3(JF23–2) AMP4(JS4A–2) 4th axis servo amp/Linear scale in 2nd path SCALE4(JF24–2) nc AMP5(JS5A–2) 5th axis servo amp in 2nd path AMP6(JS6A–2) 6th axis servo amp in 2nd path SV–CHK(JA26) Connector for 5th and 6th–axis servo check in 2nd path Option 3 board To I/O unit. (for PMC–RC) I/O card DO–1(C54) w DO–2(C55) DO–3(C56) DI–1(C50) Operator‘s panel DI–2(C51) Magnetics cabinet w DI–3(C52) DI–4(C53) DI–5(C56) w DI–6(C57) 96 . etc.2.

c CRT (JA1) From MDI (JA2) Option board 1 for CAP II R232–1(JD5A) MMC board for MMC Punch panel Tape reader e R232–2(JD5B) MPG 3 MPG(JA3) nt CPD1 CPD1 JD1B Operators panel in- terface JD1B JD1A CP32 I/O Unit–A ce IOLINK(JD1A) JA1A (Option 3 for PMC–RC) A–OUT1(JA8A) nc Analog voltage output Braker AC200V AC reactor MCC Braker AC200V Control motor amp.3. CRT. LCD CN1 unit DC24V CK1 Main CPU r.c α series PSM CX4 CX1B TB1 CX2B JX1B Emergency stop w CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A JY2 PC SPDL–1(JA7A) JA7B SPM w Absolute Spindle TB2 PC battery motor TB1 CX2B JX1B w APCBAT(JA4A) 6V TB1 CX2A JX1A AMP1(JV1) JA1B SVM TB2 (TYPE–A I/F) Servo ENC1(JF1) PC motor 1st axis or 1st axis in 1st path SCALE1(JF21) Linear scale 97 . CX1A TB2 CX3 ÅÅ .3 18–TB/MB Power unit AC–IN (CP1) AC200XAC240V AC–OUT (CP2) For color CRT.B–62445E/03 2. HARDWARE 2. PDP AC200V om (CP3) ON/OFF (CP4) ON/OFF +24V (CP5) CN2 CRT/MDI +24E (CP6) For monochro.

HARDWARE B–62445E/03 (Main CPU) SERV02(JS2A) 2nd axis servo amp/Linear scale or SCALE2(JF22) 2nd axis servo amp/Linear scale in 1st path SERV03(JS3A) 3nd axis servo amp/Linear scale or 3nd axis servo amp/Linear scale in 1st path SCALE3(JF23) SERV04(JS4A) 4th axis servo amp/Linear scale or SCALE4(JF24) 4th axis servo amp/Linear scale in 1st path SERV05(JS5A) 5th axis servo amp or 5th axis servo amp in 1st path SERV06(JS6A) 6th axis servo amp or 5th axis servo amp in 1st path SV–CHK(JA26) Connector for 5th axis and 6th servo check om Option 2 board Analog voltage output A–OUT2(JA8B) Analog I/O AIN(JA6) High speed DI HDI(JA5) SPDL–2(JA7B) Control motor amp α series SPM r.c APCBAT(JA4A)  Absolute pulse coder battery AMP1(JS1A–2) 1st axis servo amp/ Linear scale in 2nd path SCALE1(JF21–2) e AMP2(JS2A–2) 2nd axis servo amp/ Linear scale in 2nd path SCALE2(JF22–2) AMP3(JS3A–2) SCALE3(JF23–2) AMP4(JS4A–2) nt 3rd axis servo amp/Linear scale in 2nd path 4th axis servo amp/Linear scale in 2nd path ce SCALE4(JF24–2) I/O card DO–1(C54) DO–2(C55) nc DO–3(C56) DI–1(C50) Operator‘s panel DI–2(C51) Magnetics cabinet DI–3(C52) DI–4(C53) .c DI–5(C56) DI–6(C57) w w w 98 .2.

HARDWARE 2.4.1  .B–62445E/03 2.4 INTER–MACHINE CONNECTION 2.

5″ LCD or 1 8.  Connection of Series 16 om Power supply (ON/OFF) CRT/MDI unit CP4 unit .4″ LCD 2 0V 2 0V 3 3 99 . LCD : AC200V) CP11(LCD) r. LCD/MDI CP5(monochrome CRT : DC24V) unit or PDP/ CP2 or CP3 CN2(CRT/PDP) MDI unit (Color CRT.c Main CPU board CRT(JA1) Without CAP–II CN1 e MDI(JA2) CK1 nt Option 1 board CRT(JA1) With CAP–II ce  Terminal layout CP2 or CP3 CN2 (CRT) For 9″ color CRT nc 1 200A or 9″ PDP 1 200A or 14″ color CRT 2 200B 2 200B 3 G 3 G .c CP5 CN2 For 9″ mono- w 1 +24V chrome CRT 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 0V 0V 0V +24V +24V w 3 CP5 +24V w CRT 1 +24V For 9.

2.c VSYNC (12) (03) VSYNC 0V (16) (10) 0V Shield e Connector : Half–pitch Connector: MR20–pins(CRT) (PCR) G Connector: Half–pitch 20–pins(LCD) nt Recommended cable material:A66L–0001–0296 (Coaxial cable) MDI(JA2) CK1 ce *KEY00 (01) (01) *KEY00 *KEY02 (02) (02) *KEY02 *KEY04 (03) (03) *KEY04 *KEY06 (04) (04) *KEY06 *COM00 (05) (05) *COM00 nc *COM02 (06) (06) *COM02 *COM04 (07) (07) *COM04 *COM06 (08) (08) *COM06 *COM08 (09) (09) *COM08 *COM10 (10) (10) *COM10 . HARDWARE B–62445E/03  Cable connection JAI (For LCD) CRT(JA1) CN1 (For CRT) VDR (01) (01) VDR 0V (02) (08) 0V VDG (03) (04) VDG 0V (04) (11) 0V om VDB (05) (05) VDB 0V (06) (12) 0V HSYNC (18) (02) HSYNC 0V (14) (09) 0V r.c *KEY01 (11) (11) *KEY01 *KEY03 (12) (12) *KEY03 *KEY05 (13) (13) *KEY05 w *KEY07 (14) (14) *KEY07 *COM01 (15) (15) *COM01 *COM03 (16) (16) *COM03 *COM05 (17) (17) *COM05 w *COM07 (18) (18) *COM07 *COM09 (19) (18) *COM09 *COM11 (20) (20) *COM11 w Shield Connector : Half–pitch Connector: Half–pitch 20–pins(PCR) G 20–pins(PCR) Recommended cable material : A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG 10 Pairs) 100 .

B–62445E/03 2.2 Reader/Puncher Interface  Connection Main CPU board R232–1(JD5A) (Channel 1) om Punch panel R232–2(JD5B) (Channel 2) Tape reader etc.c  Cable connection R232–1(JD5A) R232–2(JD5B) Punch panel e RD (01) (03) RD 0V (02) DR (03) (06) DR nt 0V (04) 0V (06) CD (07) 0V (08) (05) CS (08) CD ce (09) +24V (10) SD (11) 0V (12) (02) SD nc ER (13) 0V (14) (20) ER RS (15) 0V (16) (04) RS (17) (07) SG .4. HARDWARE 2. r.c (18) +24V (19) (20) (25) +24V (01) FG w Shield Connector : Half–pitch Connector DBM–25S (PCR) G G w Recommended cable material: A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG 10 Pairs) w 101 .

of cables w When cable A66L–0001–0286 is used for one unit of manual pulse generator. #24AWG 3 pairs) . HARDWARE B–62445E/03 2.0394Ω/m and 3 cables are used.2V in accordance with length +5V/0V.2 3 =76.75[m] 2A R 2 0.0394 102 .2. Therefore.1A) w R : Registance per cable length L : Cable length m : No.3 Manual Pulse Generator  Connection Main CPU board MPG(JA3) 1st manual pulse #1 generator 2nd manual pulse #2 generator om 3rd manual pulse #3 generator  Cable connection MPG(JA3) Manual pulse generator r. registance is 0.1 0.4. cable length can be extended up to 50 m according to the following equation: L= V m = 0. A R 2L Voltage drop V = w m Where A : manual pulse generator’s current (0.c  Voltage drop by cable Restrict voltage drop by cable to less than 0.c HA1 (01) (05) HA1 1st HB1 (02) (06) HB1 +5V (09) (03) +5V 0V (12) (04) 0V e HA2 (03) (05) HA2 2nd HB2 (04) (06) HB2 nt +5V (18) 0V (14) (03) (04) +5V 0V ce HA3 (05) (05) HA3 3rd HB3 (06) (06) HB3 +5V (20) (03) +5V 0V (16) (04) 0V Shield nc Connector : Half–pitch G 20–pins(Hirose) Recommended cable :A66L–0001–0286(#20AWG 6.

etc.c IOLINK (JD1A) JD1B SIN (01) (01) SIN *SIN (02) (02) *SIN w Twist pair SOUT (03) (03) SOUT *SOUT (04) (04) *SOUT w 0V (11) (11) 0V 0V (12) (12) 0V w 0V (13) (13) 0V 0V (14) (14) 0V (+5V) (09) Shield (09) (+5V) (+5V) (18) G (18) (+5V) (+5V) (20) (20) (+5V) Connector : Half–pitch Connector : Half–pitch 20 pins(PCR) 20 pins(PCR) Recommended cable:A66L–0001–0284 (#28AWG 10 pairs) 103 .B–62445E/03 2. JD1A PMC–RA : Main CPU r.c PMC–RB : Main CPU JD1B PMC–RC : Option 3 Optical I/O link Group #1 adapter (For I/O JD1A unit A) O/E Base #0 Base #1 e Optical I/O link nt Optical fiber adapter O/E JD1B Group #2 Terminator JD1A ce Expanded up to 16 Groups nc  Cable connection within group .4 I/O LINK  Connection Power supply unit +24E(CP6) · I/O Unit–A · PCB for standard machine operator’s panel Main CPU board JD1B · Operator’s panel om or IO LINK (JD1A) Group #0 connection unit Option 3 boards · Power Mate . HARDWARE 2.4.

c ID1 (09) (09) ID1 ID2 (17) (17) ID2 ID3 (18) (18) ID3 0V (15) (15) 0V w 0V (16) (16) 0V Shield Connector : Half–pitch Connector : Half–pitch G w 20–pins (PCR) 20–pins (PCR)  Cable connection in the w terminator  TRM1 (04) TRM1 (10) TRM2 (12) TRM2 (19) TRM3 (14) TRM3 (20) Connector : Half–pitch 20–pins (PCR) 104 .2. When optical I/O link adapter is used. cable length between units is extended by 200m.c JD2 JD3 JD2 Terminator e To next Group JD2 JD3 nt S1 (01) *S1 (02) S2 (03) (01) (02) (03) S1 *S1 S2 ce *S2 (04) (04) *S2 S3 (05) (05) S3 *S3 (06) (06) *S3 S4 (07) (07) S4 *S4 (08) (08) *S4 nc S5 (11) (11) S5 *S5 (12) (12) *S5 S6 (13) (13) S6 *S6 (14) (14) *S6 .  Connection between bases (with I/O unit–A) From the last Group om Base #0 Base #1 AIF01A AIF01A JD1B JD1A r. Do not connect when metal cable is used. cable length between units is extended by 10 m. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 Note Connect +5V when optical I/O link adapter is used. When metal cable is used.

B–62445E/03 2. HARDWARE

2.4.5 When using the C series servo amplifier or α series servo amplifier (type
Servo Interface A interface), connect the serial pulse coder cable to the NC.
When using the α series servo amplifier (type B interface), connect the
serial pulse coder cable to the servo amplifier module. 

Connection to C series
servo amplifier AC reactor
T1 200VAC∼230VAC

Ž
Main CPU board AMPx S e r v o
Option 2 boards (JVx) amp. Off by emergency stop
CN1 AC100V
Power line

om
ÔÔÔ
Linear scale etc.
ENCx
x:1~8 (JFx)

SCALEx Servo
PC motor
(JF2x)

r.c
APCBAT(JA4A, JA4B) battery
6V 

Connection to cable

e
AMPx(JVx) CN1

nt IRn (01)
GDRn (02)
*PWMAn (03)
(01) IRn
(02) GDRn
(03) *PWMAn
0V (04) (04) COMAn
ce
*PWMBn (05) (05) *PWMBn
0V (06) (06) COMBn
*PWMCn (07) (07) *PWMCn
0V (08) (08) COMCn
nc

(09) (09) GNDn *1
*MCONn (10) (10) *MCONn
ISn (11) (11) ISn
GDSn (12) (12) GDSn
*PWMDn (13) (13) *PWMDn
.c

0V (14) (14) COMDn
*PWMEn (15) (15) *PWMEn
0V (16) (16) COMEn
*PWMFn (17) (17) *PWMFn
w

0V (18) (18) COMFn
(19) (19)
*DRDYn (20) (20) *DRDYn
w

Shield
Connector : Half– Connector : MR20–pin (S series servo amp.)
pitch 20–pin G Connector : Half–pitch 20–pin (C series servo amp.)
w

Recommended cable material : A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG 10 pairs)

Notes
1 Not used for C series amplifier.
2 Suffix n in signal name is an axis number 1 to 8.

105

2. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 

Connection to α series
servo amplifier For Series 16/160
(Interface type A) MAIN–A

Main CPU board AMPx SVM
Option 2 boards (JVx)
JVαB
Power line

ÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔ
Linear scale etc.
ENCx
x:1~8 (JFx)

om
SCALEx Servo
PC motor
(JF2x)

APCBAT(JA4A, JA4B) battery
6V

r.c 
Connection to cable
AMPx(JVx) JVxB

IRn (01) (01) IRn
GDRn (02) (02) GDRn

e
*PWMAn (03) (03) *PWMAn
0V (04) (04) COMAn
nt *PWMBn (05)
0V (06)
*PWMCn (07)
(05) *PWMBn
(06) COMBn
(07) *PWMCn
(08) COMCn
ce
0V (08)
(09) GNDn *1
(09)
(10) *MCONn
*MCONn (10) (11) ISn
ISn (11) (12) GDSn
*PWMDn (13) (13) *PWMDn
nc

0V (14) (14) COMDn
*PWMEn (15) (15) *PWMEn
0V (16) (16) COMEn
*PWMFn (17) (17) *PWMFn
(18) COMFn
.c

0V (18)
(19) (19)
*DRDYn (20) (20) *DRDYn
Shield
w

Connector : Half– Connector : Half–pitch 20–pin
pitch 20–pin G

Recommended cable material : A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG 10 pairs)
w

Note
w

Suffix n in signal name is an axis number 1 to 8.

106

B–62445E/03 2. HARDWARE 

Connection to α series
servo amplifier For Series 16/160
(Interface type B) MAIN–B and Series 18/180

Main CPU board AMPx Servo
Option 2 boards (JSxA) amp.
CN1
Power line

ÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔ
Linear scale etc.

om
SCALEx Servo
PC motor
(JF2x)

r.c 
Connection to cable
AMPx(JSxA) CN1

IRn (01) (01) IRn
GDRn (02) (02) GDRn

e
*PWMAn (03) (03) *PWMAn
0V (04) (04) 0V
nt *PWMCn (05)
0V (06)
*PWMEn (07)
(05) *PWMCn
(06) 0V
(07) *PWMEn
(08) 0V
ce
0V (08)
(09) *DRDYn
*DRDYn (09)
(10) *MCONn
*MCONn (10) (11) ISn
ISn (11) (12) GDSn
GDSn (12) (13) *ELBLn
nc

*ENBLn (13) (14) 0V
0V (14) (15) PDn
PDn (15) (16) *PDn
*PDn (16) (17) PREQn
(18) *PREQn
.c

*PREQn (18)
0V (19) (19) 0V
*0V (20) (20) *0V
Shield
w

Connector : Half– Connector : Half–pitch 20–pin
pitch 20–pin G

Recommended cable material : A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG 10 pairs)
w

Note
w

Suffix n in signal name is an axis number.

107

2. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 

Connection of serial
pulse coder ENCx(JFx) Serial pulse coder

SD (01) (E) REQ
*SD (02) (F) *REQ
REQ (05)
(A) SD
*REQ (06)
(B) *SD
+6V (07) (T) +6V
+5V (09)
+5V (18)

om
+5V (20)
(L) +5V
0V (12)
0V (14)
(M) 0V
0V (16) (U) OVA
(N) SHLD(Sheil
G

r.c
Connector : Half–pitch Connector : CANON
20–pin
Recommended cable : A66L–0001–0286(#20AWG 6, #24AWG 10 pairs)

e
Note
nt
Be sure to note voltage drop by cable resistance. 

Serial pulse coder A
ce
0.40 R 2L
Voltage drop(Max) = 0.25[V] y
M

0.40 : Current consumed by pulse coder
nc

R : Resistance per unit length of cable [Ω/m]
L : Cable length [m]
M : No. of wires to 5V and 0V
.c

[Ex1]A66L–0001–0286(20/0.18,0.0394W/m) : L (Max)=23.79m
[Ex2]A66L–0001–0157(50/0.18,0.016W/m) : L (Max)=58.59m
However, as a cable of 11 dia. cannot be clamped with the half–pitch
w

connector, prepare a relaying connector or fabricate the cabel by
peeling off the sheeth and covering a heat–shrinkable tube.
When using the C series servo amplifier or series servo amplifier
w

(type A), connect the serial pulse coder to the NC.When using the
series servo amplifier (type B), connect the serial pulse coder to the
servo amplifier.
w

108

B–62445E/03 2. HARDWARE 

Serial pulse coder C
0.35 R 2L
Voltage drop (Max) = 0.20[V] y
M

0.35 : Current consumed by pulse coder
R : Resistance per unit length of cable [Ω/m]
L : Cable length [m]
M : No. of wires to 5V and 0V
[Ex1]A66L–0001–0286(20/0.18,0.0394W/m) : L (Max)=21.75m
[Ex2]A66L–0001–0157(50/0.18,0.016W/m) : L (Max)=53.57m

om
However, as a cable of 11 dia. cannot be clamped with the half–pitch
connector, prepare a relaying connector or fabricate the cabel by
peeling off the sheeth and covering a heat–shrinkable tube.

r.c
Note
When using the C series servo amplifier or α series servo
amplifier (type A), connect the serial pulse coder to the NC.
When using the α series servo amplifier (type B), connect

e
the serial pulse coder to the servo amplifier.

2.4.6
nt
Connections by Type of
ce
Detectors 

Built–in pulse coder
nc

Connection to C series
servo amplifier Main CPU board Servo amplifier

Table

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
.c

AMP α CN1

Servo
PC
motor
w

ENC α
Position + speed+rotor position
w

SCALE α
w

109

2. HARDWARE B–62445E/03

Connection to α series
servo amplifier For MAIN–A
(Interface of type A) of Series 16/160 SVM

Table
AMP α
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
CN1

PC Servo
motor
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ENC α
Position + speed+rotor position

om
SCALE α

Connection with α series

r.c
servo amplifier For MAIN–B
(Interface of type B) of Series 16/160
and Series 18/180 SVM
S Main CPU board

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
S Option2 board Table

e
AMP α JVαB

nt JFα
PC Servo
motor
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Position + speed+rotor position
ce
SCALE α
nc

D Separate type pulse
coder,Linear scale
.c

Connection to C series
servo amplifier Main CPU board Servo amplifier Linear scale
w

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
AMP α CN1


w

PC Servo
motor
ENC α
Velocity feedback+ rotor posi-
w

tion

SCALE α
Position feedback
Separate type PC

110

B–62445E/03 2. HARDWARE

D Connection to α series
servo amplifier SVM Linear scale
S Main CPU board
(Interface of type A) S Option board

AMP α CN1
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
PC Servo
motor
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ 

ENC α
Velocity feedback+ rotor posi-
tion

om
SCALE α
Position feedback
Separate type PC

D Connection with α series

r.c
servo amplifier SVM Linear scale
(Interface of type B) S Main CPU board
S Option2 board

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
AMP α JVαB

JFα 

e
PC Servo
motor

nt Velocity feedback+ rotor posi-
tion
ce
SCALE α
Position feedback
Separate type PC

D Associated parameters
nc

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 OPTx

#1 (OPTx) : Separate type pulse coder of position detector is :
.c

0 : used
1 : not used
w
w
w

111

2. HARDWARE B–62445E/03

2.4.7
Combining Serial
Spindle and Analog
Spindle 

Only serial spindle is
used
Main CPU Serial
board spindle
#1 Spindle
A–OUT1

om
motor
(JA8A)

SPDL–1 PC
(JA7A) (Note)

Serial

r.c
spindle
#2
Spindle
motor

e
PC 

Only analog spindle is nt
used
Analog
spindle
ce
Main CPU Spindle
board motor

A–OUT1
(JA8A)
nc

SPDL–1
PC
(JA7A) 

Serial spindle and
.c

analog spindle are used Analog
spindle
Spindle
w

motor

Main CPU Serial
board spindle
w

#1
Spindle
A–OUT1 motor
(JA8A)
w

SPDL–1 PC
(JA7A) (Note)

Serial
spindle
#2 Spindle
motor

PC

112

B–62445E/03 2. HARDWARE

Note
When a serial spindle amplifier is used, an optical I/O link
adapter must be used to connect the main CPU board to the
spindle amplifier. When the  series spindle amplifier is
used, the main CPU board and spindle amplifier must be
connected using a metallic cable.

om
2.4.8
Connection to α serial Main CPU board
SPDL–x
(JA7A, B)
Spindle Amplifier Option 2 board JA7B
SPM
x:1, 2

r.c
JD1(Optical I/O link
SPDL–x (JA7A, B) adapter)

e
SIN (01) (01) SIN
*SIN (02) (02) *SIN
nt SOUT (03)
*SOUT (04)
(03) SOUT
(04) *SOUT
ce
0V (11) (11) 0V
nc

0V (12) (12) 0V
0V (13) (13) 0V
0V (14) (14) 0V
0V (15) (15) 0V
0V (16) (16) 0v
.c

Shield
Connector:Half–pitch
Connector:Half–pitch G 20–pin
20–pins
Recommended cable:A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG 10pairs)
w
w
w

113

2. HARDWARE B–62445E/03

2.4.9
Optical I/O link
Connection to Serial Main CPU board
SPDL–x
adapter Serial
(JA7A, B)
Spindle Amplifier Option 2 board Optical fiber spindle
amplifier
x:1, 2 JD1 COP1 CN11A

JD1(Optical I/O link
SPDL–x (JA7A, B) adapter)

om
SIN (01) (02) SIN
*SIN (02) (01) *SIN

SOUT (03) (04) SOUT
*SOUT (04) (03) *SOUT

r.c
+5V (09) (09) +5V
+5V (18) (18) +5V
+5V (20) (20) +5V
0V (11) (11) 0V
0V (12) (12) 0V

e
0V (13) (13) 0V
0V (14) (14) 0V
0V (15) (15) 0V
nt 0V (16)

Connector:Half–pitch
20–pins
G
Shield
(16) 0V

Connector:Half–pitch
20–pin
ce
Recommended cable:A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG 10pairs)
nc
.c
w
w
w

114

4.11 w Remote Buffer Interface  Connection R232–1(JD5C) (Channel 3) Option 1 board Host computer R422–1(JD6A) Host computer 115 .4.20m) w 2. Max. B) Analog spindle amplifier SVC (07) 0V (05) ENB1 (08) e ENB2 (09) Shield Connector : Half–pitch Connector : MR20–pin 20–pins G ntSPDL–x(JA7A. B) Spindle x:1. B) amplifier SPDL–x (JA7A. 2 Position coder motor PC om Spindle r.c 0V (16) (K) 0V Shield Connector : Half–pitch G Connector : CANON w 20–pins Recommended cable : A66L–0001–0286(#20AWG 3 pairs.c A–OUTx(JA8A.B–62445E/03 2.10 Connection to Analog Main CPU board Control signal Option 2 board Analog Spindle Amplifier spindle AC200V A–OUTx (JA8A. B) SC (01) Position coder (B) SC ce *SC (02) (P) *SC PA (05) (A) PA *PA (06) (N) *PA PB (07) (C) PB *PB (08) (R) *PB nc +5V (09) +5V (18) +5V (20) (H) +5V 0V (12) 0V (14) . HARDWARE 2.

c 0V (16) (07) SG (17) (18) +24V (19) (25) +24V (20) (01) FG e Shield Connector: Half–pitch Connector: D–SUB 25–pin 20–pins (PCR) G nt Notes ce 1 Connect RS when CS is not used.c w w w 116 . b) Always connect CD to ER nc . 2 Connect as follows when protocol A or extended protocol A is used: a) Connect to ER when DR is not used.2. HARDWARE B–62445E/03  Example of cable connection R232–3(JD5C) Host computer RD (01) (02) SD 0V (02) DR (03) (20) ER 0V (04) CS (05) (04) RS 0V (06) CD (07) (08) CD 0V (08) (09) om +24V (10) SD (11) (03) RD 0V (12) ER (13) (06) DR 0V (14) RS (15) (05) CS r.

B–62445E/03 2. Note that pin arrangement of *DM signal on NC side is not regular to escape from damage due to wrong connection.c *RS (16) (27) *CS TR (17) (12) TR *TR (18) (30) *TR (+24V) (19) (20) (01) FG e Shield Connector : Half–pitch 20 pins (PCR) G Connector : D–SUB25 Pin nt Note ce Be sure to use the twisted pair cable. nc 2. HARDWARE  Example of RS–422 cable R422–1(JD6A) Host computer RD (01) (04) RD *RD (02) (22) *RD RT (03) (17) TT *RT (04) (35) *TT CS (05) (07) RS *CS (06) (25) *RS DM (07) (11) TR Note) *DM (09) (29) *TR 0V (08) (19) SG om (+24V) (10) SD (11) (06) RD *SD (12) (24) *RD TT (13) (08) RT *TT (14) (26) *RT RS (15) (09) CS r.c Interface  Connection diagram w HDI (JA5) Option 2A/B board Touch sensor w w HDI (JA5) Built–in I/O card Touch sensor 117 .4.12 High–speed DI Signal .

c 0V (18) Shield Connector: Half–pitch 20–pin (PCR) G Parameter 6200 and 6202 decide which signals are used for the high speed e skip signal. HARDWARE B–62445E/03  Connection details HDI (JA5) HDI0 (01) 0V (02) HDI1 (11) 0V (12) HDI2 (03) 0V (04) HDI3 (13) 0V (14) om HDI4 (05) 0V (06) 0V (16) HDI6 (07) 0V (08) HDI7 (17) r.2. nt ce nc .c w w w 118 .

B–62445E/03 2. HARDWARE 2.4.5mA to +0.c  Receiver circuit w CNC 5V w 18kΩ 36kΩ AIN03 Input voltage range –10V to +10V w 36kΩ Input current range –0.c Cable connection 1 e AIN0 Analog input CH0 2 0V 11 nt Analog input CH1 Analog input CH2 AIN1 0V AIN2 12 3 4 ce 0V 13 AIN3 Analog input CH3 14 0V 5 AOUT Analog output nc 0V Shield G .13 Analog signal interface CNC OPTION 2 JA6 (PCR-EV20MDT) 1 AIN0 11 AIN1 2 0V 12 0V 3 AIN2 13 AIN3 4 0V 14 0V 5 AOUT 15 om 6 0V 16 0V 7 17 8 18 9 19 10 20 r.5mA 0V 0V 0V 1000kΩ AOUT Output voltage –10V to +10V 0V 0V 119 .

When designing the power magnetics cabinet. electromagnetic induction. However. and power supply AI is used.c temperature Relative Normal : 75% or less humidity Temporary (with 1 month) : 95% or less Vibration In operation : 0. such as the control unit and CRT/MDI.4. In this manual “cabinet” refers to the following: Requirement (1) Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing the control unit or peripheral units. The CNC also is designed to be protected from external noise. Normal machine shop environment ment (The environment must be considered if the cabinets are in a location where the density of dust. r. the servo section w w 2.14 The peripheral units.15 The power capacity of the CNC control unit. nc Power capacity of When the control unit has four slots or 0. Room tem. (2) Cabinet for housing the flexible turnkey system provided by FANUC: (3) Operation pendant.2. In operation 0° to 45° perature In storage or transportation –20° to 60° Change in 1. manufactured by the machine tool builder. or power supply BI is used. and ground loops. om The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shall conform to the following table. The CNC component units are often installed close to the parts generating noise in the power magnetics cabinet. section . have been Environmental designed on the assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets.4. coolant. and noise has many uncertain factors. for housing the CRT/MDI unit or operator’s panel . Possible noise sources into the CNC are capacitive coupling. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 2.4.c When the control unit has six or more 1KVA slots. is obtained by adding the power capacity of the control section and the power capacity of the servo section. it is difficult to w measure the level and frequency of noise quantitatively.16 The CNC has been steadily reduced in size using surface–mount and Action Against Noise custom LS1 technologies for electronic components. which in this section means Power Capacity the specification required for the power supply. Power capacity of Depends on servo motor type. It is important to prevent both noise from being generated and generated noise from being introduced into the CNC.) ce 2. This precaution improves the stability of the CNC machine tool system. and/or organic sol- nt vent is relatively high.5 G or less e Environ.1°C/minute max. (4) Equivalent to the above. guard against noise in the machine as described in the following: 120 .4KVA the control less.

c and power magnetics cabinet Separate group B as far from group C as possible. C Cable between the CNC and Bind the cables in group C sepa- e servo amplifier rately from group A or cover group shield C with an electromagnetic shield. and e ay AC/DC relay B DC solenoid (24VDC) Connect diodes with DC solenoid and relay. w 121 . DC relay (24 VDC) Bind the cables in group B sepa- rately from group A or cover group DI/DO cable between the CNC B with an electromagnetic shield. 2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between groups with grounded steel plates.c the shield w Notes 1 The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one another w when binding the cables in each group. r.B–62445E/03 2. the power lines for the servo and spindle motors) Connect spark killers or diodes AC/DC solenoid om t tthe with e so e oda solenoid d relay. spindle amplifier Be sure to perform shield proces proces- ce Cable for the position coder sing Cable for the manual pulse gener- ator Cable between the CRT and MDI nc RS232C and RS422 interface cables Cable for the battery Other cables to be covered with . Group Signal line Action A Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group A sepa- rately (Note 1) from groups B and Secondary AC power line C or cover group A with an elec elec- AC/DC power lines (containing tromagnetic shield (Note 2). Cable for position and velocity nt feedback Separate group C as far from Cable between the CNC and group B as possible. HARDWARE  Separating signal lines The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in the following table : Bind the cables in each group as described in the action column. possible DI/DO cable between the CNC It is more desirable to cover group and machine B with the shield.

Frame ground system (FG) The frame ground system (FG) is used for safety. and suppressing external and internal noises. Signal ground system (SG) The signal ground (SG) supplies the reference voltage (0V ) of the electrical signal system to the machine. ⋅ The grounding resistance of the system gorund shall be 100 ohms or w less (class 3 grounding). and shields for the interface cables between the units are connected.c ⋅ Connect the signal gournd with the frame ground (FG) at only one w place in the CNC control unit. 3. System ground system om The system ground system is used to connect the frame ground systems connected between devices or units with the ground. 2. panels. ⋅ The system ground cable must have enough cross–sectional area to safely carry the accidental current flow into the system gound when w an accident such as a short circuit occurs. HARDWARE B–62445E/03  Ground The following ground systems are provided for the CNC machined tool: 1. Notes on connecting the ground systems r.) ⋅ Use the cable containing the AC power wire and the system gound wire so that power is supplied with the ground wire connected. it must have the cross–sectional area of the AC power cable or more.2. the frames and cases of the units. In the frame ground system. control netics er unit e unit Operator ’s panel nt ce Machine tool Power magnet- ics cabinet nc Distribution board . amplifi. (Generally.c Signal ground system Frame ground system System ground system Power Servo CNC mag. 122 .

c Connect the 0 V line of the electronic circuit in the control unit with the w ground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground (SG) terminal.B–62445E/03 2. w w 123 . HARDWARE  Connecting the signal ground (SG) of the control unit Control unit om M3 or M4 terminal for signal ground Printed cir- (SG) cuit board r.c SG M3 e Ground cable nt Ground cable: wire with a sectional area of 2mm2 or more ce nc F r a me System ground Ground plate of ground = the cabinet (FG) . The SG terminal is located on the printed circuit board at the rear of the control unit.

w follow this cable clamp method. This cable clamp treatment is for both cable support and proper grounding of the shield.2. A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices are turned on or off. use a spark killer for an AC device or a diode for a DC device. Notes on selecting the spark killer om Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. To reduce the pulse voltage. The ground plate must be made by the machine tool builder. Push and clamp by the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. To insure stable CNC system operation. (A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage. FANUC therefore recommends a CR spark killer.) r. but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. This type of spark killer is called a CR spark killer. This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuits to be disturbed. HARDWARE B–62445E/03  Noise suppressor The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet. Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Metal fittings for clamp are attached to the control unit.c The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shall conform to the following based on the current (1(A)) and DC resistance of the stationary coil : 1) Resistance (R):Equivalent to DC resistance of the coil e 2) Capacitance (C): I 2 – I 2 (µF) 10 20 nt Equivalent circuit of the spark killer R C ce Spark killer AC relay nc Motor . and set as follows: 124 .c Spark killer w  Cable clamp and shield w The CNC cables that required shielding should be clamped by the method processing shown below.

c Shield cover e nt ce nc . HARDWARE ÇÇ ÇÇ Ô ÇÇ ÇÇ Control unit Machine side ÇÇ installation ÇÇ board ÇÇ Ô ÇÇ ÇÇ Ground plate ÇÇ om Å Õ ÔÔ ÇÇ Å Õ ÔÔ Metal fittings for clamp ÇÇ Õ ÇÇ ÇÇ r.c w w w 125 .B–62445E/03 2.

e This LED is lit when overcurrent. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 2.overvoltage.5.  In case of Power supply nt ce AI and BI CP1 (AC IN) nc F1 CP2 CP3 (AC OUT) (AC OUT) .2. or low volt- ALM(Red) age occurs in direct current output voltage.c  LED display This LED is lit when the input AC power voltage is sup- PIL(Green) plied to CP1.5 LED DISPLAY AND MODULE CONFIGURATION OF PCB 2.1 Power supply unit Name Code om Power supply unit AI A16B–1212–0900 A16B–1212–0901 Power supply unit BI A16B–1212–0870 A16B–1212–0871 Power supply unit C A20B–1005–0420 r. etc.c Battery case w PIL w LED ALM CP4 w (CONTROL) CP5 CP6 (24V) (24E) F3 F4 Locations of connectors and fuses 126 .  Disposition of Connector.

B–62445E/03 2.c 3 3 24 V Output DC OUT CP1B e 4 4 Battery CP8 nt ce 5 Battery case 5 nc . HARDWARE  In case of power supply C I/O PSU Connector Function Abbreriation number om 1 Fuse 1 2 2 24 V Input DC IN CP1A r.c w w w 127 .

2A A60L–0001–0075#3.c w w w 128 .5R Circuit protected by fuses Symbol Use F1 200–VAC input r.0 F4 5A A60L–0001–0046#5. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 D Fuse Fuses Power Symbol Rating Ordering code Individual code supply F1 7.2 F4 5A A60L–0001–0046#5.5A A60L–0001–0046#7.5A A60L–0001–0245#GP75 AI A02B–0200–K100 A02B 0200 K100 F3 3.0 F1 7. etc.2.0 om C A02B–0177–K101 – 7. D Battery Lithium battery code : A98L–0031–0012 e nt ce nc .c F3 Power supply for 9I monochrome CRT or LCD F4 I/O unit.5A A60L–0001–0245#GP75 BI A02B 0200 K101 A02B–0200–K101 F3 5A A60L–0001–0075#5.

10A Rec– 15V 200 VAC Noise input filter tifier –15V G Regu–OVP . 3 lator S F2/7.5A.c PWM om 2. HARDWARE . 3 PC: (PRIMARY CURRENT LIMIT) +24V –1 F3/3. 10A RY2.3A A15 +5V Auxil– Trans– +24V +15V DV Regulator OVP iary form– Regu– Regu– power er lator lator PWM nc supply +5V OCL PIL 129 RY1 BAT ALM ON/ Oscil– +24V BATTERY OFF lator control MAC BAT Control ce 0V +24V A10 Reference +5V Voltage Signal EN CP4 voltage control monitor control Power ON PF (RY1) –A1 ON circuit –A3 COM nt –A2 OFF A15 –15 Power OFF –B2 FA e VOLT– AGE +15 +24 Alarm output –B3 FB ALM External alarm input –B1 AL * * OUT– PUT time r.2A 200 VAC input w –2 +24V OVP Regulator –3 +15V supply unit (AI and BI) w +15V  Block diagram for power MAO Regu–OVP CP1 R F1/7.c PC lator +5V F5/0. B–62445E/03 +24E w OCL: (OVERCURENT LIMIT) OVP: (OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION) F4/5A CP2.5A.

2 Main CPU Board D Series16 MAIN–A⋅4–axis specification Main CPU Board Name Code Main CPU board A16B–3200–0010 Main CPU board A16B–3200–0170 om MAIN–B⋅6–axis specification Name Code Main CPU board A16B–3200–0110 r. Replace the option 2 board. is not started j:OFF J:ON w STATUS JJjj An error occurred in the BASIC SRAM of the ALARM jjj option 2 board (with sub–CPU).c D LED display 1 LED status in power on routine (Green LED) j:OFF J:ON STATUS jjjj Power OFF e STATUS JJJJ Initial status after power on (CPU is not run yet) STATUS JjJJ Waiting for other CPU’s answer (ID setting) nt STATUS jjJJ STATUS JJjJ Detect other CPU’s answer (Finished of ID set- ting) FANUC BUS initialized ce STATUS jJjJ PMC initialization (1) finished STATUS JjjJ All PCBs configuration finished STATUS JJJj PMC initial running finished (PMC–RB only) STATUS jJJj Waiting for digital servo initialization nc STATUS Jjjj All initialized. 130 . running 2 LED status in power of alarm j:OFF J:ON :Don’s care STATUS jJjj RAM parity alarm occured in main CPU board .2. fitted with option 2 board (with sub–CPU). HARDWARE B–62445E/03 2.5.c ALARM JJj or servo alarm occured in OPTION–2 board STATUS jJjj Servo alarm (watch dog alarm) occured ALARM jJJ STATUS jJjj w Other system alarm occured ALARM jJj STATUS JJJJ The system is stopped before the CPU is acti- ALARM J vated w 3 LED display when the system.

B–62445E/03 2.c (2) DRAM A20B–2901–0940 RAM for the RAM: 6MB module CNC A20B–2901–0941 RAM: 4MB system A20B–2901–0942 RAM: 2MB w (3) PMC A20B–2901–0960 PMC control PMC MODULE: PMP2 + SLC module A20B–2901–0961 PMC MODULE: PMP2 w (4) CRTC A20B–2902–0270 CRT CRTC MODULE: 14I CRT module text display A20B–2902–0271 CRTC MODULE: 9I CRT control A20B–2902–0272 CRTC MODULE: VGA w A20B–2902–0273 CRTC MODULE: 14I CRT A20B–2902–0275 CRTC MODULE: VGA A20B–2902–0276 CRTC MODULE: 9I CRT A20B–2902–0277 CRTC MODULE: 9I CRT A20B–2902–0278 CRTC MODULE: VGA (5) Spindle A20B–2901–0980 Spindle SERIAL SPINDLE LSI module control ANALOG SPINDLE LSI A20B–2901–0981 SERIAL SPINDLE LSI A20B–2901–0982 ANALOG SPINDLE LSI 131 . FLASH ROM MODULE: 4MB ADDITIONAL SRAM: 512KB FLASH ROM MODULE: 4MB ce A20B–2902–0082 graphic FLASH ROM MODULE: 2MB system system. servo system. HARDWARE D D Location of modules A16B–3200–0010 Connector Connector LED name number Use CRT JA1 CRT video signal MDI JA2 MDI keyboard R232–1 JD5A RS–232–C serial port R232–2 JD5B RS–232–C serial port (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) MPG JA3 Manual pulse generator IOLINK JD1A FANUC I/O LINK SPDL–1 JA7A Serial spindle A–OUT1 JA8A Analog output APCBAT JA4A Battery for use with the APC AMP1 JV1 Axis 1 servo amplifier om Connector for add on AMP2 JV2 Axis 2 servo amplifier AMP3 JV3 Axis 3 servo amplifier board AMP4 JV4 Axis 4 servo amplifier ENC1 JF1 Axis 1 pulse coder (8) (6)(7) ENC2 JF2 Axis 2 pulse coder ENC3 JF3 Axis 3 pulse coder (9) ENC4 JF4 Axis 4 pulse coder SCALE1 JF21 Axis 1 scale r. A20B–2902–0090 Additional FLASH ROM MODULE: 8MB SRAM S ADDITIONAL SRAM: 2MB A20B–2902–0091 FLASH ROM MODULE: 8MB nc A20B–2902–0092 FLASH ROM MODULE: 6MB A20B–2902–0093 FLASH ROM MODULE: 8MB ADDITIONAL SRAM: 512KB A20B–2902–0094 FLASH ROM MODULE: 6MB ADDITIONAL SRAM: 512KB . Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen nt (1) FROM module A20B–2902–0080 CNC A20B–2902–0081 system.c SCALE2 JF22 Axis 2 scale SCALE3 JF23 Axis 3 scale ROM for SCALE4 JF24 Axis 4 scale boot e No.

2. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 No. Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen (8) Graphic A20B–8200–0010 Graphic GRAPHIC ENGINE FUNC- function display TION board A20B–8200–0011 control r.c SCALE3 JF23 Axis 3 scale ROM for SCALE4 JF24 Axis 4 scale boot w w w 132 .c  Location of modules A16B–3200–0170 Connector Connector name number Use LED e CRT JA1 CRT video signal MDI JA2 MDI keyboard R232–1 JD5A RS–232–C serial port nt (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) R232–2 MPG IOLINK SPDL–1 A–OUT1 JD5B JA3 JD1A JA7A JA8A RS–232–C serial port Manual pulse generator FANUC I/O LINK Serial spindle Analog output ce APCBAT JA4A Battery for use with the APC Connector AMP1 JV1 Axis 1 servo amplifier for add on AMP2 JV2 Axis 2 servo amplifier AMP3 JV3 Axis 3 servo amplifier board AMP4 JV4 Axis 4 servo amplifier nc ENC1 JF1 Axis 1 pulse coder (9) (7)(8) ENC2 JF2 Axis 2 pulse coder ENC3 JF3 Axis 3 pulse coder (10) ENC4 JF4 Axis 4 pulse coder SCALE1 JF21 Axis 1 scale SCALE2 JF22 Axis 2 scale . Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen (6) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo SERVO 3/4 AXIS module control A20B–2902–0061 3 or 4 axis (7) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo SERVO 1/2 AXIS module control A20B–2902–0061 1 or 2 axis Add on board om No.

SERVO 1/2 AXIS .c module trol 1st or A20B–2902–0061 2nd axis Add on board w No.c module A20B–2901–0961 PMC MODULE:PMP2 (5) CRTC A20B–2902–0270 CRT text CRTC MODULE:14”CRT module display A20B–2902–0271 CRTC MODULE:9”CRT control A20B–2902–0272 CRTC MODULE:VGA e A20B–2902–0273 CRTC MODULE:14”CRT A20B–2902–0275 CRTC MODULE:VGA nt A20B–2902–0276 A20B–2902–0277 CRTC MODULE:9”CRT CRTC MODULE:9”CRT ce A20B–2902–0278 CRTC MODULE:VGA (6) Spindle A20B–2901–0980 Spindle SERIAL SPINDLE LSI module control ANALOG SPINDLE LSI A20B–2901–0981 SERIAL SPINDLE LSI A20B–2901–0982 ANALOG SPINDLE LSI nc (7) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con.25MB (3) FROM A20B–2902–0341 CNC sys. SERVO 3/4 AXIS module trol 3rd or A20B–2902–0061 4th axis (8) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con. Servo A20B–2902–0343 system FLASH ROM MODULE:2MB Graphic A20B–2902–0410 system.B–62445E/03 2. Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen (1) DRAM A20B–2901–0940 CNC DRAM:6MB module system A20B–2901–0941 DRAM:4MB RAM A20B–2901–0942 DRAM:2MB (2) SRAM A20B–2902–0350 Expanded ADDITIONAL SRAM:256KB module SRAM A20B–2902–0351 ADDITIONAL SRAM:768KB A20B–2902–0352 ADDITIONAL SRAM:2. HARDWARE No. FLASH ROM MODULE:8MB SRAM for A20B–2902–0411 system FLASH ROM MODULE:6MB (4) PMC A20B–2901–0960 PMC control PMC MODULE:PMP2+SLC r. FLASH ROM MODULE:4MB om module tem. Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen w (8) Graphic A20B–8200–0010 Graphic GRAPHIC ENGINE FUNC- function display TION board A20B–8200–0011 control w 133 .

2. HARDWARE B–62445E/03  Location of modules A16B–3200–0110 Connector Connector LED name number Use (Total version of PC board is 04A or older) CRT JA1 CRT video signal MDI JA2 MDI keyboard R232–1 JD5A RS–232–C serial port R232–2 JD5B RS–232–C serial port (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) MPG JA3 Manual pulse generator IOLINK JD1A FANUC I/O LINK SPDL–1 JA7A Serial spindle A–OUT1 JA8A Analog output APCBAT JA4A Battery for use with the Connector APC om for add on SERVO1 JS1A Axis 1 servo amplifier SERVO2 JS2A Axis 2 servo amplifier board SERVO3 JS3A Axis 3 servo amplifier SERVO4 JS4A Axis 4 servo amplifier (10) (8)(9) SERVO5 JS5A Axis 5 servo amplifier SERVO6 JS6A Axis 6 servo amplifier (11) SCALE1 JF21 Axis 1 scale SCALE2 JF22 Axis 2 scale r.c SCALE3 JF23 Axis 3 scale SCALE4 JF24 Axis 4 scale ROM for SV–CHK JA26 SERVO CHECK boot e nt ce nc .c w w w 134 .

25MB (2) FROM A20B–2902–0341 CNC sys. SERVO 5/6 AXIS module trol 5th or A20B–2902–0061 6th axis w (9) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con. Servo system Graphic om A20B–2902–0343 system. Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen (1) SRAM A20B–2902–0350 Expanded ADDITIONAL SRAM:256KB module SRAM A20B–2902–0351 ADDITIONAL SRAM:768KB A20B–2902–0352 ADDITIONAL SRAM:2. SERVO 1/2 AXIS module trol 1st or A20B–2902–0061 2nd axis . FLASH ROM MODULE:2MB SRAM for system (3) DRAM A20B–2901–0940 CNC DRAM:6MB module system A20B–2901–0941 DRAM:4MB RAM r. SERVO 3/4 AXIS module trol 3rd or A20B–2902–0061 4th axis w w 135 .c A20B–2901–0942 DRAM:2MB (4) PMC A20B–2901–0960 PMC control PMC MODULE:PMP2+SLC module A20B–2901–0961 PMC MODULE:PMP2 (5) CRTC A20B–2902–0270 CRT text CRTC MODULE:14”CRT module display e A20B–2902–0271 CRTC MODULE:9”CRT control A20B–2902–0272 CRTC MODULE:VGA nt A20B–2902–0273 A20B–2902–0275 A20B–2902–0276 CRTC MODULE:14”CRT CRTC MODULE:VGA CRTC MODULE:9”CRT ce A20B–2902–0277 CRTC MODULE:9”CRT A20B–2902–0278 CRTC MODULE:VGA (6) Spindle A20B–2901–0980 Spindle SERIAL SPINDLE LSI module control ANALOG SPINDLE LSI nc A20B–2901–0981 SERIAL SPINDLE LSI A20B–2901–0982 ANALOG SPINDLE LSI (7) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con. HARDWARE No.c (8) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con. FLASH ROM MODULE:4MB module tem.B–62445E/03 2.

e  Location of modules A16B–2202–0860 nt LED Connector Connector name number Use ce (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) CRT JA1 CRT video signal MDI JA2 MDI keyboard R232–1 JD5A RS–232–C serial port nc R232–2 JD5B RS–232–C serial port Connector MPG JA3 Manual pulse generator IOLINK JD1A FANUC I/O LINK for add on SPDL-1 JA7A Serial spindle board A-OUT1 JA8A Analog output AMP1 JS1A Axis 1 servo amplifier .c Main CPU board A16B–3200–0160  LED display LED display is same as Series 16. GRAPHIC ENGINE FUNC- function play control TION board A20B–8200–0011  Series18 MAIN–B⋅4–axis specification Main CPU Board Name Code om Main CPU board A16B–2202–0860 MAIN–B⋅6–axis specification Name Code r. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 Add on board No.c (9) (7)(8) AMP2 JS2A Axis 2 servo amplifier AMP3 JS3A Axis 3 servo amplifier (10) AMP4 JS4A Axis 4 servo amplifier SCALE1 JF21 Axis 1 scale w SCALE2 JF22 Axis 2 scale ROM for SCALE3 JF23 Axis 3 scale boot SCALE4 JF24 Axis 4 scale w w 136 . See P130.2. Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen (8) Graphic A20B–8200–0010 Graphic dis.

GRAPHIC ENGINE FUNC- function play control TION board A20B–8200–0011 w 137 .c module trol 1st or A20B–2902–0061 2nd axis Add on board w No.B–62445E/03 2. SERVO 1/2 AXIS .c module A20B–2901–0961 PMC MODULE:PMP2 (5) CRTC A20B–2902–0270 CRT text CRTC MODULE:14”CRT module display A20B–2902–0271 CRTC MODULE:9”CRT control A20B–2902–0272 CRTC MODULE:VGA e A20B–2902–0273 CRTC MODULE:14”CRT A20B–2902–0275 CRTC MODULE:VGA nt A20B–2902–0276 A20B–2902–0277 CRTC MODULE:9”CRT CRTC MODULE:9”CRT ce A20B–2902–0278 CRTC MODULE:VGA (6) Spindle A20B–2901–0980 Spindle SERIAL SPINDLE LSI module control ANALOG SPINDLE LSI A20B–2901–0981 SERIAL SPINDLE LSI A20B–2901–0982 ANALOG SPINDLE LSI nc (7) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con. FLASH ROM MODULE:4MB om module tem.25MB (3) FROM A20B–2902–0341 CNC sys. FLASH ROM MODULE:8MB SRAM for A20B–2902–0411 system FLASH ROM MODULE:6MB (4) PMC A20B–2901–0960 PMC control PMC MODULE:PMP2+SLC r. Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen (1) DRAM A20B–2901–0940 CNC DRAM:6MB module system A20B–2901–0941 DRAM:4MB RAM A20B–2901–0942 DRAM:2MB (2) SRAM A20B–2902–0350 Expanded ADDITIONAL SRAM:256KB module SRAM A20B–2902–0351 ADDITIONAL SRAM:768KB A20B–2902–0352 ADDITIONAL SRAM:2. Servo A20B–2902–0343 system FLASH ROM MODULE:2MB Graphic A20B–2902–0410 system. HARDWARE No. SERVO 3/4 AXIS module trol 3rd or A20B–2902–0061 4th axis (8) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con. Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen w (8) Graphic A20B–8200–0010 Graphic dis.

c w w w 138 . HARDWARE B–62445E/03  Location of modules A16B–3200–0160 Connector Connector LED name number Use CRT JA1 CRT video signal MDI JA2 MDI keyboard R232–1 JD5A RS–232–C serial port (1) R232–2 JD5B RS–232–C serial port (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) MPG JA3 Manual pulse generator IOLINK JD1A FANUC I/O LINK SPDL–1 JA7A Serial spindle A–OUT1 JA8A Analog output APCBAT JA4A Battery for use with the APC om Connector SERVO1 JS1 Axis 1 servo amplifier for add on SERVO2 JS2 Axis 2 servo amplifier board SERVO3 JS3 Axis 3 servo amplifier SERVO4 JS4 Axis 4 servo amplifier SERVO5 JS5 Axis 5 servo amplifier (10) (8) (9) SERVO6 JS6 Axis 6 servo amplifier SCALE1 JF21 Axis 1 scale (11) r.c SCALE2 JF22 Axis 2 scale SCALE3 JF23 Axis 3 scale SCALE4 JF24 Axis 4 scale SV–CHK JA26 SERVO CHECK ROM for boot e nt ce nc .2.

SERVO 5/6 AXIS . SERVO 1/2 AXIS module trol 1st or A20B–2902–0061 2nd axis (8) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con. SERVO 3/4 AXIS module trol 3rd or w A20B–2902–0061 4th axis Add on board w No. Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen (1) DRAM A20B–2901–0940 CNC DRAM:6MB module system A20B–2901–0941 DRAM:4MB RAM A20B–2901–0942 DRAM:2MB (2) SRAM A20B–2902–0350 Expanded ADDITIONAL SRAM:256KB module SRAM A20B–2902–0351 ADDITIONAL SRAM:768KB A20B–2902–0352 ADDITIONAL SRAM:2.c module A20B–2901–0961 PMC MODULE:PMP2 (5) CRTC A20B–2902–0270 CRT text CRTC MODULE:14”CRT module display A20B–2902–0271 CRTC MODULE:9”CRT control A20B–2902–0272 CRTC MODULE:VGA e A20B–2902–0273 CRTC MODULE:14”CRT A20B–2902–0275 CRTC MODULE:VGA nt A20B–2902–0276 A20B–2902–0277 CRTC MODULE:9”CRT CRTC MODULE:9”CRT ce A20B–2902–0278 CRTC MODULE:VGA (6) Spindle A20B–2901–0980 Spindle SERIAL SPINDLE LSI module control ANALOG SPINDLE LSI A20B–2901–0981 SERIAL SPINDLE LSI A20B–2901–0982 ANALOG SPINDLE LSI nc (7) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con.25MB (3) FROM A20B–2902–0341 CNC sys.c module trol 5th or A20B–2902–0061 6th axis (9) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con. HARDWARE No. GRAPHIC ENGINE FUNC- function play control TION board A20B–8200–0011 139 .B–62445E/03 2. Servo A20B–2902–0343 system FLASH ROM MODULE:2MB Graphic A20B–2902–0410 system. FLASH ROM MODULE:8MB SRAM for A20B–2902–0411 system FLASH ROM MODULE:6MB (4) PMC A20B–2901–0960 PMC control PMC MODULE:PMP2+SLC r. Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen w (10) Graphic A20B–8200–0010 Graphic dis. FLASH ROM MODULE:4MB om module tem.

5. J:ON. J:ON.c @ Graphic function with CAP–II j:OFF.2. running ALARM jjj STATUS ll Communication error occured from OPTION 1 board ALARM jjj 140 . running ALARM jjj STATUS jJ ROM parity error occured nc ALARM Jjj Replace the ROM module STATUS Jj RAM parity error occured ALARM Jjj Replace the OPTION 1 board STATUS jl Command error occured ALARM Jjj Replace the OPTION 1 board . :Don’t care l:Blink nt STATUS JJJJ ALARM Jjj STATUS jJ ALARM jjj Initial status after power on (CPU is not run yet) Initial status after power on (CPU is not run yet) ce STATUS Jj Waiting for other CPU’s answer (ID setting) ALARM jjj STATUS jj Graphic CPU initialized.c STATUS ll NMI from other PCB (LED are blinking at same time) ALARM Jjj Check the LED status on other PCB STATUS lj BUS error occured w ALARM Jjj Replace the OPTION 1 board STATUS lL Divide error occured (LED are blinking alternatingly) ALARM Jjj Replace the OPTION 1 board STATUS Jl w Invalid interrupt occured ALARM Jjj Replace the OPTION 1 board ⋅ Communication function w j:OFF. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 2. :Don’t care l:Blink STATUS JJJJ Initial status after power on (CPU is not run yet) ALARM Jjj STATUS jJ Remote buffer CPU initialized.3 Option 1 board Name Specifications Function Option 1 board A16B–2200–0913 Remote buffer A16B–2200–0914 DNC1 A16B–2200–0919 Graphic (CAP–II) A16B–2200–0918 Graphic +Remote buffer A16B–2200–0916 Graphic + DNC1 D LED display om Status of graphic function Status of communication function STATUS jjjj ALARM jjj e r.

B–62445E/03 2. A20B–2901–0361 Commu.c  Type of modules No. HARDWARE  Location of modules Connector Connector name number Use LED CPU CRT JA1 CRT video signal R232–3 JD5C RS–232–C serial port (5) R422–1 JD6A RS–422 serial port Communication function ROM Graphic ROM om Module JNA (1) (2) (3) (4) F–BUS back plane connector r.c A20B–2902–0275 CRTC MODULE:VGA (5) Commu. COMMUNICATION MODULE nication nication w control control module w w 141 . Name Specifications Function Display of system e configuration screen (1) Graphic A20B–2900–0350 CPU for Not display nt (2) CPU mod- ule Graphic engine CAP II A20B–2900–0311 Graphic control for GRAPHIC ENGINE MODULE 2 ce module TT (3) Graphic A20B–2900–0311 Graphic GRAPHIC ENGINE engine control MODULE 1 module nc (4) CRTC A20B–2902–0270 CRT text CRTC MODULE: module display 14”CRT control A20B–2902–0272 CRTC MODULE:VGA A20B–2902–0273 CRTC MODULE: 14”CRT .

HARDWARE B–62445E/03 2.c w w w 142 .4 Option 2 board Series 16 Option 2 board for MAIN–A Name Specifications Function Option 2 board A16B–2202–0400 CPU for 2 path control + Additional axis Option 2 board A16B–2202–0401 Additional axis Option 2 board A16B–2202–0890 CPU for 2 path control + Additional axis om Option 2 board A16B–2202–0891 Additional axis Series 16 Option 2 board for MAIN–B r.2.c Name Specifications Function Option 2 board A16B–2202–0850 CPU for 2 path control + Additional axis Option 2 board A16B–2202–0851 Additional axis e Series 18 Option 2 board for MAIN–B nt Name Option 2 board Specifications A16B–2202–0853 Function CPU for 2 path control + Additional axis ce nc .5.

3 STATUS JJjj A RAM module of at least 2M is not mounted. ALARM Jjj nt 2 3 STATUS jJjj ALARM jjJ STATUS jJjj ALARM jjj Servo alarm (watch dog. nc ALARM Jjj 2 STATUS JJjj A DRAM parity alarm occurred. ALL CLR om 5 STATUS jjJJ Waiting for software initialization 1 6 STATUS JJjJ Waiting for software initialization 2. ALARM jjJ w 143 . etc. Replace the DRAM ALARM Jjj module. LED display NC statue 1 STATUS JJJJ An SRAM parity error occurred. initialization of keys.B–62445E/03 2. Initializing CMOS 7 STATUS jJjJ Initializing position coder 8 STATUS jJJj Waiting for digital servo system startup STATUS Jjjj r. Check and replace the DRAM . ⋅ LED display of additional axis j:OFF.c module. LED display NC statue 1 STATUS JJJJ On normal operation ALARM jjj w 2 STATUS JJJJ Servo alarm occurred in additional axis. J:ON w No. ⋅ LED display when an erro occurs j:OFF. LED display NC statue 1 STATUS jjjj When power is off 2 STATUS JJJJ Startup status immediately after power is turned or CPU is not running 3 STATUS jJJJ Initializing RAM 4 STATUS JjJJ Software ID has been set. LED display NC statue e 1 STATUS jJjj RAM parity error occurred. HARDWARE D LED display ⋅ LED display transition when the power is turned onj:OFF. J:ON No. J:ON The STATUS LEDs are green and the ALARM LEDs are red.c 9 Startup has been completed and the system is now in normal operation mode. No.) occurred Other alarm occurred ce ⋅ LED display when system is not started j:OFF. or anoth- ALARM jjj er alarm occurred. J:ON No.

2. HARDWARE B–62445E/03  Location of modules A16B–2202–0400 and Connector Connector name number Use A16B–2202–0401 LED HDI JA5 High–speed skip signal A–1N JA6 Analog input SPDL–2 JA7B Serial spindle (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) A–OUT2 JA8B Analog output APCBAT JA4B Battery for use with the APC AMP5 JV5 Axis 5 servo amplifier AMP6 JV6 Axis 6 servo amplifier AMP7 JV7 Axis 7 servo amplifier om AMP8 JV8 Axis 8 servo amplifier ENC5 JF5 Axis 5 pulse coder JNA (6)(7) ENC6 JF6 Axis 6 pulse coder ENC7 JF7 Axis 7 pulse coder F–BUS ENC8 JF8 Axis 8 pulse coder back plane SCALE5 JF25 Axis 5 scale SCALE6 JF26 Axis 6 scale connector SCALE7 JF27 Axis 7 scale r. Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen e (1) FROM A20B–2902–0081 2nd path FLASH ROM MODULE:4MB module macro A20B–2902–0082 FLASH ROM MODULE:2MB nt (2) SRAM module A20B–2900–0541 CNC system A20B–2901–0991 RAM ADDITIONAL SRAM: 512KB ADDITIONAL SRAM: 2MB ce (3) DRAM A20B–2901–0940 CNC DRAM:6MB module system A20B–2901–0941 DRAM:4MB RAM A20B–2901–0942 DRAM:2MB (4) Spindle A20B–2901–0984 Spindle SERIAL SPINDLE LSI nc module control ANALOG SPINDLE LSI A20B–2901–0985 SERIAL SPINDLE LSI A20B–2901–0986 ANALOG SPINDLE LSI (5) HAM A20B–2900–0280 Analog H–SKIP DI & ANALOG I/O: . SERVO 7/8 AXIS module trol 7th or A20B–2902–0061 8th axis w (7) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con. SERVO 5/6 AXIS module trol 5th or A20B–2902–0061 6th axis w 144 .c module I/O+HDI HDI+ANALOG A20B–2900–0281 HDI H–SKIP DI & ANALOG I/O: HDI w (6) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con.c SCALE8 JF28 Axis 8 scale No.

B–62445E/03 2. SERVO 5/6 AXIS module trol 5th or A20B–2902–0061 6th axis w 145 .25MB ce (3) DRAM A20B–2901–0940 CNC DRAM:6MB module system A20B–2901–0941 DRAM:4MB RAM A20B–2901–0942 DRAM:2MB nc (4) Spindle A20B–2901–0984 Spindle SERIAL SPINDLE LSI module control ANALOG SPINDLE LSI A20B–2901–0985 SERIAL SPINDLE LSI A20B–2901–0986 ANALOG SPINDLE LSI . SERVO 7/8 AXIS module trol 7th or A20B–2902–0061 8th axis w (7) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con. 0891 Connector Connector name number Use LED HDI JA5 High–speed skip signal A–1N JA6 Analog input SPDL–2 JA7B Serial spindle A–OUT2 JA8B Analog output APCBAT JA4B Battery for use with the APC (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) AMP5 JV5 Axis 5 servo amplifier AMP6 JV6 Axis 6 servo amplifier AMP7 JV7 Axis 7 servo amplifier om AMP8 JV8 Axis 8 servo amplifier ENC5 JF5 Axis 5 pulse coder ENC6 JF6 Axis 6 pulse coder ENC7 JF7 Axis 7 pulse coder ENC8 JF8 Axis 8 pulse coder SCALE5 JF25 Axis 5 scale (6) (7) SCALE6 JF26 Axis 6 scale SCALE7 JF27 Axis 7 scale r. Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen e (1) FROM A20B–2902–0081 2nd path FLASH ROM MODULE:4MB module macro A20B–2902–0082 FLASH ROM MODULE:2MB nt (2) SRAM module A20B–2902–0350 CNC A20B–2902–0351 A20B–2902–0352 expanded RAM ADDITIONAL SRAM: 256KB ADDITIONAL SRAM: 768KB ADDITIONAL SRAM: 2.c (5) HAM A20B–2900–0280 Analog H–SKIP DI & ANALOG I/O: module I/O+HDI HDI+ANALOG A20B–2900–0281 HDI H–SKIP DI & ANALOG I/O: HDI w (6) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con.c SCALE8 JF28 Axis 8 scale No. HARDWARE  Location of modules A16B–2202–0890.

0851 Connector Connector name number Use LED HDI JA5 High-speed skip signal A-IN JA6 Analog input SPDL-2 JA7B Serial spindle A.c No. Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen e (1) FROM A20B–2902–0081 2nd path FLASH ROM MODULE:4MB module macro A20B–2902–0082 FLASH ROM MODULE:2MB nt (2) SRAM module A20B–2902–0350 CNC A20B–2902–0351 A20B–2902–0352 system RAM ADDITIONAL SRAM: 256KB ADDITIONAL SRAM: 768KB ADDITIONAL SRAM: 2. SERVO 3/4 AXIS module trol 3rd or A20B–2902–0061 4th axis w (8) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con.25MB ce (3) DRAM A20B–2901–0940 CNC DRAM:6MB module system A20B–2901–0941 DRAM:4MB RAM A20B–2901–0942 DRAM:2MB nc (4) Spindle A20B–2901–0984 Spindle SERIAL SPINDLE LSI module control ANALOG SPINDLE LSI A20B–2901–0985 SERIAL SPINDLE LSI A20B–2901–0986 ANALOG SPINDLE LSI .OUT2 JA8B Analog output APCBAT JA4B Battery for use with the APC AMP1 JS1A-2 Axis 1 servo amplifier (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) AMP2 JS2A-2 Axis 2 servo amplifier AMP3 JS3A-2 Axis 3 servo amplifier AMP4 JS4A-2 Axis 4 servo amplifier om AMP5 JS5A-2 Axis 5 servo amplifier AMP6 JS6A-2 Axis 6 servo amplifier SCALE1 JF21-2 Axis 1 scale SCALE2 JF22-2 Axis 2 scale SCALE3 JF23-2 Axis 3 scale SCALE4 JF24-2 Axis 4 scale (6) (7) (8) SV. SERVO 5/6 AXIS module trol 5th or A20B–2902–0061 6th axis w (7) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con.2.c (5) HAM A20B–2900–0280 Analog H–SKIP DI & ANALOG I/O: module I/O+HDI HDI+ANALOG A20B–2900–0281 HDI H–SKIP DI & ANALOG I/O: HDI w (8) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con. HARDWARE B–62445E/03  Location of modules A16B–2202–0850. SERVO 1/2 AXIS module trol 1st or A20B–2902–0061 2nd axis 146 .CHK JA8C Servo check r.

SERVO 1/2 AXIS module trol 1st or A20B–2902–0061 2nd axis w 147 .c No.c (5) HAM A20B–2900–0280 Analog H–SKIP DI & ANALOG I/O: module I/O+HDI HDI+ANALOG A20B–2900–0281 HDI H–SKIP DI & ANALOG I/O: HDI w (6) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con. SERVO 3/4 AXIS module trol 3rd or A20B–2902–0061 4th axis w (7) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo con. Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen e (1) FROM A20B–2902–0081 2nd path FLASH ROM MODULE:4MB module macro A20B–2902–0082 FLASH ROM MODULE:2MB nt (2) SRAM module A20B–2902–0350 CNC A20B–2902–0351 A20B–2902–0352 system RAM ADDITIONAL SRAM: 256KB ADDITIONAL SRAM: 768KB ADDITIONAL SRAM: 2.25MB ce (3) DRAM A20B–2901–0940 CNC DRAM:6MB module system A20B–2901–0941 DRAM:4MB RAM A20B–2901–0942 DRAM:2MB nc (4) Spindle A20B–2901–0984 Spindle SERIAL SPINDLE LSI module control ANALOG SPINDLE LSI A20B–2901–0985 SERIAL SPINDLE LSI A20B–2901–0986 ANALOG SPINDLE LSI .B–62445E/03 2. HARDWARE  Location of modules A61B–2202–0853 Connector Connector name number Use LED HDI JA5 High-speed skip signal A-IN JA6 Analog input SPDL-2 JA7B Serial spindle A-OUT2 JA8B Analog output APCBAT JA4B Battery for use with the APC (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) AMP1 JS1A-2 Axis 1 servo amplifier AMP2 JS2A-2 Axis 2 servo amplifier AMP3 JS3A-2 Axis 3 servo amplifier om AMP4 JS4A-2 Axis 4 servo amplifier SCALE1 JF21-2 Axis 1 scale SCALE2 JF22-2 Axis 1 scale SCALE3 JF23-2 Axis 1 scale (6) (7) SCALE4 JF24-2 Axis 1 scale SV-CHK JA8C Servo check r.

Check the ALARM jjj Link device and the cables. J: ON. l: Blink No.c ⋅ e LED display of PMC–RC function (i) LED display transition when the power is turned on nt j: OFF. w 5 STATUS Jzz The parity error etc. LED display NC statue . l:Blink No. z:Don’t care. Re- w ALARM jjj place the option 3 board. Initialize the memory for LADDER or re- place it for work RAM MODULE 3 STATUS ljzz A bus error occurred (incorrect memory access).5. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 2. Replace the PMC control module. J:ON. z: Don’t care. 4 STATUS Jlzz Communication error occurred in I/O Link. (ii)LED display when an error occurs j: OFF. LED display NC statue 1 STATUS JJzz Startup status immediately after power is turned on ce 2 STATUS jJzz Waiting for each processor in the system to set its ID 3 STATUS Jjzz Waiting for each processor in the system to complete startup 4 STATUS jjzz The PMC–RC function startup has been completed nc and the system is now in normal operation. The DRAM module for the PMC may have failed.5 Option 3 board Name Specifications Function Option 3 board A16B–3200–0054 PMC–RC A16B–3200–0055 PMC–RC+CAP A16B–3200–0057 CAP D LED display om Status display of Status display of CAP–II function PMC–RC function STATUS jjjj ALARM jjj r.2. 148 . Check other boards’ LED display STATUS jlzz w 2 The parity error of the memory for LADDER or work ALARM Jjj occurred. occurred in the PMC control mod- ALARM Jjj ule. 6 STATUS Llzz A checksum error occurred in the system program ALARM jjj memory.c 1 STATUS llzz NMI from another board (LEDs are flashing simulta- ALARM jjj neously).

Check the link devices and cables.c DRAM for CAP–II may have failed ALARM JjJ A parity error occurred in the The DRAM module for PMC DRAM for PMC may have failed w ALARM JJj The CPU for PMC is not started Check whether the main board has been activated normally ALARM JJJ The operation of the PMC The PMC module may have w module is abnormal failed w 149 .B–62445E/03 2. J:ON ce LED display Description Cause and required action ALARM jjJ An I/O link error occurred. 3 STATUS zzLj A bus error occurred (incorrect memory access). 4 STATUS zzLl A ROM parity error occurred (STATUS LEDs 3 and 4 ⋅ nt ALARM jjj Alarm LED display are flashing alternately). e ALARM jjj Replace the option 3 board. ALARM Jjj A parity error occurred in the The DRAM module for CAP–II . J: ON. z: Don’t care No. HARDWARE ⋅ LED display of CAP–II function j: OFF. LED display NC statue r. LED display NC statue 1 STATUS JJJJ Startup status immediately after power is turned on ALARM jjj 2 STATUS zzjJ Waiting for each procesor in the system to set its ID ALARM jjj 3 STATUS zzJj Waiting for each processor in the system to complete ALARM jjj startup 4 STATUS zzjj The CAP II function startup has been completed and om ALARM jjj the system is now in normal operation ⋅ LED display when an error occurs j: OFF. z: Don’t care No. Replace the CAP II ROM module. Initialize ALARM jjj the sub–memory. nc ALARM jJj A parity error occurred in the The SRAM module for CAP–II SRAM for CAP–II may be out of order ALARM jJJ A parity error occurred in the The DRAM module for PMC DRAM for PMC may have failed. 2 STATUS zzjL A CAP II sub–memory parity error occurred. Check other boards’ LED display. Ll: Blink. Ll: Blink. j:OFF.c 1 STATUS zzLL NMI from another board (STATUS LEDs 3 and 4 are ALARM jjj flashing simultaneously). J: ON.

c No. display ce CAP (3) ROM A20B–2901–0413 DRAM+ SRAM MODULE :512KB module for SRAM for DRAM MODULE :512KB CAP CAP–II (4) DRAM A20B–2902–0191 DRAM for ADDITIONAL DRAM(MGR) nc module for PMC DRAM(APPLICATION) :2MB PMC A20B–2902–0192 ADDITIONAL DRAM(MGR) DRAM(APPLICATION) :1MB A20B–2902–0193 ADDITIONAL DRAM(MGR) .c DRAM(APPLICATION) :512KB A20B–2902–0194 ADDITIONAL DRAM(MGR) w A20B–2902–0196 DRAM(APPLICATION) :2MB A20B–2902–0197 DRAM(APPLICATION) :1MB A20B–2902–0198 DRAM(APPLICATION) w :512KB (5) PMC A20B–2901–0960 PMC MODULE:PMP2 module A20B–2901–0961 PMC MODULE:PMP2 w module 150 . Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen e (1) ROM A20B–2900–0290 CAP–II SYSTEM ROM MODULE module for system :1MB CAP nt (2) ROM module for A20B–2900–0291 A20B–2901–0390 CPU for CAP–II SYSTEM ROM MODULE :768KB No.2. HARDWARE B–62445E/03  Location of modules Connector Connector LED name number Use IOLINK JD1A2 FANUC I/O LINK (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) om JNA F–BUS Back plane connector r.

LED display Description ce 1 STATUS jJjj Parity alarm in loader control ALARM Jjj 2 STATUS jJjj Servo alarm in loader control ALARM jjJ nc 3 STATUS jJjj Alarm other than parity or servo alarm ALARM jjj . LED display Description 1 STATUS jjjj The power is off 2 STATUS JJJJ The power has just been turned on. HARDWARE 2.B–62445E/03 2. J: ON om No.5. The keys are initialized. 5 STATUS jjJJ Software initialization is being awaited (wait state 1) 6 STATUS JJjJ Software initialization is being awaited (wait state 2) 7 STATUS jJjJ The position coder is initialized e 8 STATUS jJJj Digital servo initialization is being awaited 9 STATUS Jjjj Initialization has been completed (steady state) ⋅ nt LED display upon occurrence of an error j:OFF.6 Loader Control boad Name Code Function Loader control board A16B–2202–0560 Loader control function for MAIN–A Loader control board A16B–2202–0880 Loader control function for MAIN–B ⋅ LED display transition when the power is turned on j: OFF. J:ON No. or the CPU is not operating 3 STATUS jJJJ RAM is initialized r. All data is cleared.c w w w 151 .c 4 STATUS JjJJ The software ID has been set.

Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen nt (1) FROM module A20B–2902–0082 ROM for macro on loader con- trol side FLASH ROM MODULE:2MB ce (2) DRAM A20B–2901–0941 Loader sys. DRAM:4MB module tem RAM A20B–2901–0942 DRAM:2MB (3) PMC A20B–2900–0142 PMC control PMC MODULE: BSI+SLC module A20B–2900–0143 PMC MODULE: BSI nc (4) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo SERVO 3/4 AXIS module control 3rd A20B–2902–0061 or 4th axis (5) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo SERVO 1/2 AXIS module control 1st . HARDWARE B–62445E/03  Location of modules  Incase of A16B–2202–0560 LED Connector Connector name number Use BRAKE CNBK Brake output ESP CNPW Emergency stop (1) (2) IO–1 CNWF DI/DO for workpiece feeder TP CNTP DI/DO for teach pendant IOLINK JD1A FANUC I/O LINK A–OUT JA8 Servo waveform check output om APCBAT JA4 APC battery AMP1 JV1 Servo amplifier for first axis AMP2 JV2 Servo amplifier for second axis JNA (5) (3) (4) AMP3 JV3 Servo amplfier for third axis AMP4 JV4 Servo amplifier for fourth axis F–BUS Back IO–2 CRM1 DI/DO for loader main body r.c A20B–2902–0061 or 2nd axis w w w 152 .2.c plane JF CRF1 Pulse coder for first to fourth connector axes e No.

c w w w 153 .c No. Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen e (1) FROM A20B–2902–0082 ROM for FLASH ROM MODULE:2MB module macro of loader side nt (2) DRAM module A20B–2901–0941 Loader sys- A20B–2901–0942 tem RAM DRAM:4MB DRAM:2MB ce (3) PMC A20B–2900–0142 PMC control PMC MODULE: BSI+SLC module A20B–2900–0143 PMC MODULE: BSI (4) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo SERVO 3/4 AXIS module control 3rd A20B–2902–0061 or 4th axis nc (5) Servo A20B–2902–0060 Servo SERVO 1/2 AXIS module control 1st A20B–2902–0061 or 2nd axis .B–62445E/03 2.2 CRM1 DI/ DO for loader main body AMP1 r. HARDWARE  Location of modules A16B–2202–0880 LED Connector Connector name number Use BRAKE CNBK Brake output ESP CNPW Emergency stop (1) (2) IO–1 CNWF DI/DO for workpiece feeder TP CNTP DI/DO for teach pendant IOLINK JD1A FANUC I/O LINK A–OUT JA8 Servo waveform check output om AMP1 JS1A Servo amplifier for first axis AMP2 JS2A Servo amplifier for second axis (3) (4) (5) AMP3 JS3A Servo amplifier for third axis AMP4 JS4A Servo amplifier for fourth axis IO.

5.c I/O card add–on A20B–9001–0480 Use with A16B–2200–0950 or board A16B–2200–0955 listed above e Note This printed circuit board has no LED display.5. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 2. 154 .7 I/O Card (Sink Type Output) Name Code Function I/O card A16B–2200–0950 DI : 104 DO : 80 With high–speed skip (sink type output) A16B–2200–0951 DI : 104 DO : 72 With high–speed skip A16B–2200–0952 DI : 80 DO : 56 With high–speed skip A16B–2200–0953 DI : 40 DO : 40 With high–speed skip om A16B–2200–0954 High–speed skip only A16B–2200–0955 DI : 104 DO : 80 Without high–speed skip A16B–2200–0956 DI : 104 DO : 72 Without high–speed skip A16B–2200–0957 DI : 80 DO : 56 Without high–speed skip A16B–2200–0958 DI : 40 DO : 40 Without high–speed skip r.2.8 I/O Card Name Code Function (Source Type Output) nc I/O card A16B–2200–0981 DI : 104 DO : 72 With high–speed skip (Source type output) A16B–2200–0982 DI : 80 DO : 56 With high–speed skip A16B–2200–0983 DI : 40 DO : 40 With high–speed skip A16B–2200–0986 DI : 104 DO : 72 Without high–speed skip .c A16B–2200–0987 DI : 80 DO : 56 Without high–speed skip A16B–2200–0988 DI : 40 DO : 40 Without high–speed skip w A16B–2202–0720 DI : 104 DO : 80 With high–speed skip A16B–2202–0721 DI : 104 DO : 72 With high–speed skip A16B–2202–0722 DI : 80 DO : 56 With high–speed skip w A16B–2202–0723 DI : 40 DO : 40 With high–speed skip A16B–2202–0725 DI : 104 DO : 80 Without high–speed skip A16B–2202–0726 DI : 104 DO : 72 Without high–speed skip w A16B–2202–0727 DI : 80 DO : 56 Without high–speed skip A16B–2202–0728 DI : 40 DO : 40 Without high–speed skip I/O card add on board A20B–8001–0150 DI : 52 DO : 40 To be used together with the above card (0720) or (0725) Note This printed circuit board has no LED display. nt ce 2.

9 I/O Cards with Power Supply (Power C) Name Code Function (Sink Type Output) I/O card A16B–2202–0690 DI : 104 DO : 72 (sink type output) A16B–2202–0691 DI : 80 DO : 56 A16B–2202–0692 DI : 40 DO : 40 Power supply A20B–1005–0420 To be used with the above I/O card  LED display om PIL (Green) Lights when DC input power voltage is applied to CP1A e r.5.c w w w 155 .c nt ce nc .B–62445E/03 2. HARDWARE 2.

I/O PSU Connector Function Abbreriation number Position 1 1 High–speed skip signal HDI JA5B om 2 DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 DO–1 C54 11 3 DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 DO–1 C55 12 4 24V Output DC OUT CP1B 3 2 5 24V Input DC IN CP1A r.c 10 ↓ w 9 w w 156 . HARDWARE B–62445E/03  Positions of connector etc.2.c 5 4 6 Battery CP8 11 Fuse e 12 LED PIL 7 nt DIGITAL INPUT 1 DI–1 C50 ce 1 8 DIGITAL INPUT 2 DI–2 C51 3 9 DIGITAL INPUT 3 DI–3 C52 8 7 10 DIGITAL INPUT 4 DI–4 C53 nc 13 Battery case .

10 I/O Cards with Power Supply (Power C) Name Code Function (Source Type Output) I/O card A16B–2202–0690 DI : 104 DO : 72 (sink type output) A16B–2202–0691 DI : 80 DO : 56 A16B–2202–0692 DI : 40 DO : 40 Power supply A20B–1005–0420 To be used with the above I/O card  LED display om PIL (Green) Lights when DC input power voltage is applied to CP1A e r.B–62445E/03 2.5. HARDWARE 2.c w w w 157 .c nt ce nc .

HARDWARE B–62445E/03  Positions of connector etc.2. I/O PSU Connector Function Abbreriation number Position 1 1 High–speed skip signal HDI JA5B om 2 DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 DO–1 C74 11 3 DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 DO–1 C75 12 4 24V Output DC OUT CP1B 3 2 5 24V Input DC IN CP1A r.c 5 4 6 Battery CP8 11 Fuse e 12 LED PIL 7 nt DIGITAL INPUT 1 DI–1 C70 ce 1 8 DIGITAL INPUT 2 DI–2 C71 3 9 DIGITAL INPUT 3 DI–3 C72 8 7 10 DIGITAL INPUT 4 DI–4 C73 nc 13 Battery case .c 10 ↓ w 9 w w 158 .

c ALARM Jjj w w w 159 .5. Initializing CMOS 7 STATUS Jjjj Initialization has been completed (steady state). . LED display NC statue 1 STATUS jjjj When power is off 2 STATUS JJJJ Start up status immediately after power is turned or r. HARDWARE 2. LED display j:OFF.B–62445E/03 2. J:ON NC statue ce 1 STATUS jJjj RAM parity error occurred. J:ON No. om j:OFF. initialization of keys. ALARM Jjj ⋅ LED display when system is not started j:OFF. ⋅ nt LED display when an erro occurs No.11 Background Graphic Board Name Code Function Background graphic A16B–2202–0852 Background graphic function board D LED display ⋅ LED display transition when the power is turned on The STATUS LEDs are green and the ALARM LEDs are red. J:ON nc No. ALL CLR 5 STATUS jjJJ Waiting for software initialization 1 e 6 STATUS JJjJ Waiting for software initialization 2. LED display NC statue 1 STATUS JJJJ SRAM parity error occurred.c CPU is not running 3 STATUS jJJJ Initializing RAM 4 STATUS JjJJ Software ID has been set. ALARM Jjj 2 STATUS JJjj DRAM parity error occurred.

HARDWARE B–62445E/03  Location of modules (1) (2) (3) om r.2.c w w w 160 . Name Specifications Function Display of system configuration screen e (1) FROM A20B–2902–0081 Background FLASH ROM MODULE:4MB module graphic A20B–2902–0082 system FLASH ROM MODULE:2MB nt (2) SRAM module A20B–2902–0350 system A20B–2902–0351 RAM ADDITIONAL SRAM: 256KB ADDITIONAL SRAM: 768KB ce A20B–2902–0352 ADDITIONAL SRAM: 2.25MB (3) DRAM A20B–2901–0940 system DRAM:6MB module RAM A20B–2901–0941 DRAM:4MB A20B–2901–0942 DRAM:2MB nc .c No.

c w w w 161 . Remarks Series16 2 Slots A02B–0200–C001 Control unit A02B–0200–C021 For power rack (Without om supply C MMC–IV) MMC IV) 3 Slots A02B–0200–C005 4 Slots A02B–0200–C002 6 Slots A02B–0200–C003 8 Slots A02B–0200–C004 r.c Series16 4 Slots A02B–0200–C010 Control unit 6 Slots A02B–0200–C011 rack (With MMC–IV) 8 Slots A02B–0200–C012 Series18 2 Slots A02B–0129–C001 e Control unit A02B–0129–C021 For power rack (Without supply C MMC–IV) MMC IV) nt 3 Slots 4 Slots 6 Slots A02B–0129–C005 A02B–0129–C002 A02B–0129–C003 ce Series18 4 Slots A02B–0129–C010 Control unit rackk (With 6 Slots A02B–0129–C011 MMC–IV) nc .6.6 LIST OF THE PCBS AND UNITS 2.B–62445E/03 2. HARDWARE 2.1 Control Unit Rack Name Drawing No.

A16B–2202–0853 w tion. specifica. 6–axis specification) A16B–3200–0160 ce Option 1 board Graphic+remote buffer A16B–2200–0918 Servo waveform Graphic+DNC1 A16B–2200–0916 cannot be Remote buffer A16B–2200–0913 displayed. 6 axes) w Series 16(MAIN–B.2. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 2.6. specifica.B. specifica. with sub–CPU) Option 3 board PMC–RC+CAP–II A16B–3200–0055 PMC–RC A16B–3200–0054 w CAP–II A16B–3200–0057 Loader MAIN–A specification A16B–2202–0560 control board MAIN–B specification A16B–2202–0880 Background drawing board A16B–2202–0852 162 . A16B–2202–0850 tion. Remarks Main CPU Series 16(MAIN–A. CPU 4 axes) sub–CPU.c tion without sub tion.c Name Drawing No. A16B–2202–0851 tion. specifica. A16B–2202–0891 Series 16(MAIN–B. with sub–CPU. DNC1 A16B–2200–0914 nc Graphic A16B–2200–0919 Option 2 board Series 16(MAIN–A.3 Control Unit P. 4–axis A16B–3200–0860 nt specification) Series 18(MAIN–B. 6–axis A16B–3200–0110 specification) Series 18(MAIN–B. CPU 4 axes) A16B–2202–0890 Series 16(MAIN–A. A16B–2202–0401 .C. sub–CPU. specifica. r.2 Power Unit Name Drawing No. without sub–CPU) Series 18(MAIN–B. A16B–2202–0400 tion with sub tion.6. Remarks Power unit AI A16B–1212–0900 A16B–1212–0901 BI A16B–1212–0870 A16B–1212–0871 C A20B–1005–0420 DC24V input om 2. 4–axis A16B–3200–0010 board specification) A16B–3200–0170 e Series 16(MAIN–B.

c Expansion board A20B–8001–0150 Used togeth- er with D (0725) or H (0720) w A (DI:40 DO:40) A16B–2202–0852 Used as power C B (DI:80 DO:56) A16B–2202–0851 C (DI:104 DO:72) A16B–2202–0850 w w 163 .c power C B (DI:80 DO:56) A16B–2202–0691 C (DI:104 DO:72) A16B–2202–0690 I/O card A (DI:40 DO:40) A16B–2200–0988 (source output A16B–2202–0728 type) e B (DI:80 DO:56) A16B–2200–0987 A16B–2202–0727 nt C (DI:104 DO:72) D (DI:104 DO:80) A16B–2200–0986 A16B–2202–0726 A16B–2202–0725 ce E (DI:40 DO:40) A16B–2200–0983 With high– speed skip A16B–2202–0723 signal input F (DI:80 DO:56) A16B–2200–0982 A16B–2202–0722 nc G (DI:104 DO:72) A16B–2200–0981 A16B–2202–0721 H (DI:104 DO:80) A16B–2202–0720 .B–62445E/03 2. HARDWARE Name Drawing No. Remarks I/O card (sink A (DI:40 DO:40) A16B–2200–0958 output type) B (DI:80 DO:56) A16B–2200–0957 C (DI:104 DO:72) A16B–2200–0956 D (DI:104 DO:80) A16B–2200–0955 E (DI:40 DO:40) A16B–2200–0953 With high– speed skip F (DI:80 DO:56) A16B–2200–0952 signal input G (DI:104 DO:72) A16B–2200–0951 H (DI:104 DO:80) A16B–2200–0950 om Expansioon board A20B–9001–0480 Used togeth- er with D or H High–speed skip signal input A16B–2200–0954 only A (DI:40 DO:40) A16B–2202–0692 Used as r.

HARDWARE B–62445E/03 Add on board Name Drawing No.c DRAM 6MB A20B–2901–0940 module 4MB A20B–2901–0941 2MB A20B–2901–0942 w Spindle control Serial+analog A20B–2901–0980 For main module CPU board Serial A20B–2901–0981 w Analog A20B–2901–0982 Serial+analog A20B–2901–0984 For option 2 board Serial A20B–2901–0985 w Analog A20B–2901–0986 164 . Remarks Graphic function board A20B–8200–0010 For main CPU board A20B–8200–0011 2. analog I/O module ROM module High–speed skip DI 1 MB A20B–2900–0281 A20B–2900–0290 ce 768 KB A20B–2900–0291 Graphic control module A20B–2900–0311 Graphic CPU module (for CAP–II) A20B–2900–0350 SRAM module (512 KB) A20B–2900–0541 nc 14–bit A/D converter module A20B–2900–0580 SRAM module (2 MB) A20B–2900–0991 CPU module (for CAP–II) A20B–2901–0390 DRAM SRAM module A20B–2901–0413 . A20B–2901–0960 terface) PMC–RB3/RC3 (without I/O link A20B–2901–0961 e interface) High–speed Analog I/O+high–speed skip DI A20B–2900–0280 nt DI.4 Modules om Name Drawing No.6.c link interface) For PMC–RC3 PMC–RB3/RC3 (with I/O link in.2. Remarks PMC control For PMC–RE A20B–2900–0140 module For loader control (with I/O link A20B–2900–0142 interface) For loader control (without I/O A20B–2900–0143 r.

HARDWARE Name Drawing No.B–62445E/03 2. MMC–IV) A20B–2902–0275 nc For 9″CRT A20B–2902–0276 When MMC is not pro pro- For LCD A20B–2902–0277 vided For 14″CRT A20B–2902–0278 FROM/SRAM FROM 4MB+SRAM 256KB A20B–2902–0341 .c module FROM 2MB+SRAM 256KB A20B–2902–0343 SRAM module 256KB A20B–2902–0350 256KB+512KB A20B–2902–0351 w 256KB+2MB A20B–2902–0352 FROM SRAM FROM 8MB+SRAM 256KB A20B–2902–0410 module w FROM 6MB+SRAM 256KB A20B–2902–0411 w 165 .c agement soft- 512KB+1MB A20B–2902–0192 ware expan- p 512KB+512KB A20B–2902–0193 sion i RAM (512 KB) 512KB A20B–2902–0194 (For opton 3) 2MB A20B–2902–0196 For option 3 e 1MB A20B–2902–0197 512KB A20B–2902–0198 nt PMC control module (for PMC–RB4/RC4) CRT control module For 14″CRT For 9″CRT A20B–2902–0250 A20B–2902–0270 A20B–2902–0271 When MMC is not pro pro- ce vided For LCD A20B–2902–0272 For 14″CRT (MMC–III) A20B–2902–0273 When MMC is provided For LCD (MMC–III. Remarks Servo control module A20B–2902–0060 A20B–2902–0061 For learning control func- tion FROM/SRAM FROM 4MB+SRAM 512KB A20B–2902–0080 module FROM 4MB A20B–2902–0081 FROM 2MB A20B–2902–0082 FROM/SRAM FROM 8MB+SRAM 2MB A20B–2902–0090 module om FROM 8MB A20B–2902–0091 FROM 6MB A20B–2902–0092 FROM 8MB+SRAM 512KB A20B–2902–0093 FROM 6MB+SRAM 512KB A20B–2902–0094 DRAM module 512KB+2MB A20B–2902–0191 With man- r.

MB A02B–0120–C052#MA . A02B–0120–C111 chrome Color A02B–0120–C112 166 .2.6. A02B–0120–C051#TAR Conforming to nt A02B–0120–C051#TAS safety standards Conforming to safety standards Symbolic keys ce MB A02B–0120–C051#MA A02B–0120–C051#MAR Conforming to safety standards A02B–0120–C051#MAS Conforming to nc safety standards Symbolic keys 9″CRT/MDI TB A02B–0120–C052#TA (standard color) (standard. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 2.c 9″PDP/MDI TB A02B–0120–C081#TA (standard key) A02B–0200–C101#TBR Conforming to safety standards +24 V input w A02B–0200–C101#TBS Conforming to safety standards +24 V input w Symbolic keys MB A02B–0120–C081#MA A02B–0200–C101#MBR Conforming to w safety standards +24 V input A02B–0200–C101#MBS Conforming to safety standards +24 V input Symbolic keys 9″ separate–type CRT unit Mono.c A02B–0120–C041#MAS Conforming to safety standards Symbolic keys 9″CRT/MDI TB A02B–0120–C042#TA (small size size.5 CRT/MDI Unit For system without MMC–IV Name Specification Remarks 9″CRT/MDI TB A02B–0120–C041#TA (small size size. color) MB A02B–0120–C042#MA e 9″CRT/MDI TB A02B–0120–C051#TA (standard monochrome) (standard. monochrome) A02B–0120–C041#TAR Conforming to safety standards om A02B–0120–C041#TAS Conforming to safety standards Symbolic keys MB A02B–0120–C041#MA A02B–0120–C041#MAR Conforming to safety standards r.

c MB A02B–0120–C072#MA w w w 167 . HARDWARE Name Specification Remarks 9″ separate–type PDP unit Mono.c Symbolic keys Separate–type MDI unit TB A02B–0120–C122#TA (standard) A02B–0120–C122#TAR Conforming to safety standards e A02B–0120–C122#TAS Conforming to safety standards Symbolic keys nt MB A02B–0120–C122#MA A02B–0120–C122#MAR Conforming to safety standards ce A02B–0120–C122#MAS Conforming to safety standards Symbolic keys 14″ CRT/MDI TB A02B–0120–C071#TA (color landscape type) (color.B–62445E/03 2. A02B–1020–C113 chrome A02B–0200–C100 Conforming to safety standards +24 V input Separate–type MDI unit TB A02B–0120–C121#TA (small size) A02B–0120–C121#TAR Conforming to safety standards A02B–0120–C121#TAS Conforming to safety standards om Symbolic keys MB A02B–0120–C121#MA A02B–0120–C121#MAR Conforming to safety standards A02B–0120–C121#MAS Conforming to safety standards r. A02B–0120–C071#TF For CAP–II nc MB A02B–0120–C071#MA 14″ CRT/MDI TB A02B–0120–C072#TA (color portrait type) (color. A02B–0120–C072#TF For CAP–II .

5″ LCD/MDI TB A02B–0200–C062#TB (color portrait type) (color.5″ LCD/MDI TB A02B–0200–C061#TB (color landscape type) (color.2″ separate–type LCD unit Mono.c A02B–0200–C062#MBR Conforming to safety standards A02B–0200–C062#MBS Conforming to w safety standards Symbolic keys 8.c A02B–0200–C061#MBR Conforming to safety standards A02B–0200–C061#MBS Conforming to safety standards Symbolic keys e 9. A02B–0200–C081 chrom e w 168 . A02B–0200–C062#TBR Conforming to nt A02B–0200–C062#TBS safety standards Conforming to safety standards Symbolic keys ce A02B–0200–C062#TFB For CAP–II A02B–0200–C062#TFBR For CAP–II Conforming to safety standards nc A02B–0200–C062#TFBS For CAP–II Conforming to safety standards Symbolic keys MB A02B–0200–C062#MB . A02B–0200–C061#TBR Conforming to safety standards A02B–0200–C061#TBS Conforming to safety standards Symbolic keys A02B–0200–C061#TFB For CAP–II A02B–0200–C061#TFBR For CAP–II Conforming to om safety standards A02B–0200–C061#TFBS For CAP–II Conforming to safety standards Symbolic keys MB A02B–0200–C061#MB r.2.4″ separate–type LCD unit Color A02B–0200–C050 w 7. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 Name Specification Remarks 9.

TB A02B–0200–C072#TB A02B–0200–C072#TBR Symbolic keys Conforming to ce safety standards A02B–0200–C072#TBS Conforming to safety standards Symbolic keys A02B–0200–C072#TFB For CAP–II nc A02B–0200–C072#TFBR For CAP–II Conforming to safety standards A02B–0200–C072#TFBS For CAP–II Conforming to . A02B–0200–C071#TBR Conforming to safety standards A02B–0200–C071#TBS Conforming to safety standards Symbolic keys om A02B–0200–C071#TFB For CAP–II A02B–0200–C071#TFBR For CAP–II Conforming to safety standards A02B–0200–C071#TFBS For CAP–II Conforming to r.c safety standards Symbolic keys MB A02B–0200–C071#MB A02B–0200–C071#MBR Conforming to safety standards e A02B–0200–C071#MBS Conforming to safety standards nt 14″ CRT/MDI (color portrait type) (color.c safety standards Symbolic keys MB A02B–0200–C072#MB w A02B–0200–C072#MBR Conforming to safety standards A02B–0200–C072#MBS Conforming to w safety standards Symbolic keys w 169 .B–62445E/03 2. HARDWARE For system with MMC–IV Name Specification Remarks 14″ CRT/MDI TB A02B–0200–C071#TB (color landcape type) (color.

5″ LCD/MDI TB A02B–0200–C066#TB (color portrait type) (color. A02B–0200–C065#TBR Conforming to safety standards A02B–0200–C065#TBS Conforming to safety standards Symbolic keys A02B–0200–C065#TFB For CAP–II A02B–0200–C065#TFBR For CAP–II Conforming to om safety standards A02B–0200–C065#TFBS For CAP–II Conforming to safety standards Symbolic keys MB A02B–0200–C065#MB r.5″ LCD/MDI TB A02B–0200–C065#TB (color landcape type) (color. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 Name Specification Remarks 9.2.c A02B–0200–C066#MBR Conforming to safety standards A02B–0200–C066#MBS Conforming to w safety standards Symbolic keys w w 170 .c A02B–0200–C065#MBR Conforming to safety standards A02B–0200–C065#MBS Conforming to safety standards Symbolic keys e 9. A02B–0200–C066#TBR Conforming to nt A02B–0200–C066#TBS safety standards Conforming to safety standards Symbolic keys ce A02B–0200–C066#TFB For CAP–II A02B–0200–C066#TFBR For CAP–II Conforming to safety standards nc A02B–0200–C066#TFBS For CAP–II Conforming to safety standards Symbolic keys MB A02B–0200–C066#MB .

c w w w 171 .4″ separate–type LCD unit Color A02B–0200–C051 Separate–type MDI unit TB A02B–0120–C121#TA (small size) A02B–0120–C121#TAR Conforming to safety standards MB A02B–0120–C121#MA A02B–0120–C121#MAR Separate–type MDI unit TB A02B–0120–C122#TA (standard) A02B–0120–C122#TAR om MB A02B–0120–C122#MA A02B–0120–C122#MAR e r.B–62445E/03 2. HARDWARE Name Specification Remarks 8.c nt ce nc .

HARDWARE B–62445E/03 2.(a)) (2) Pull out the module upward. raise it until it is locked (Fig.7 HOW TO REPLACE THE MODULES 2. (Fig.2 Insertion (1) Insert the new module board diagonally with B–SIDE outward (Fig.c nt (a) ce nc No.(b)) om 2.7.(c)).b) (2) While pushing on the upper edge of the module board.1 pin .7.c w (b) w w (c) 172 .1 Removing (1) Pull the latches of the module socket outwards. (Fig.2. e r.

6. If you replace the battery while the CNC power is off. Replace the Battery 2.8 HOW TO REPLACE THE BATTERIES 2. you should replace it within 30 minutes. The battery used for memory back up is located on the front of the main for Memory Back Up board. Then take off the battery. 3. Mount a battery and put the battery cover back on. you r. Connect the connector of new battery.8. 4. HARDWARE 2. If it will take more than 30 minutes. Or the CNC memory contents will be lost. Remove the battery cover on the main board by holding the upper and om lower part of the battery cover and pulling it towards you. e nt Power supply BATTERY Connector on ce unit cable Battery unit Connector on nc PCB side . 5. Remove the connector on the main board towards you.c Battery Power supply unit front panel w Battery Replacement w * FANUC’s order number : A98L–0031–0012 w 173 .1 1.c should replace the battery with power on.B–62445E/03 2. Lithium battery (Order number is *A02B–0200–K102) is required.

7. Consult with the MTB’s manual for where the battery case is installed.8. Pulse Coder 3.2.c Ç Ç Ç Lid e 5. 4. ce 6. nt Having exchanged the batteries put the lid back on. A battery alarm may be generated.absolute position of the machine is lost. Procedure completes. Prepare 4 commercially available dry cell batteries Replacing Batteries for 2. Loosen the screws of battery case lid and remove the lid. Separate Absolute If the batteries are replaced with the power off .c w w w 174 . Turn on CNC power.)  Figure of replacing batteries Thread r. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 2. Take care to place the batteries facing in the correct direction. nc . Turn off the power once. then turn it to on. 8. Replace the batteries in the case. (Insert the batteries as shown in the diagram with 2 facing one way and 2 the om other.2 1. but execute power off and on.

7. There is a backplane inside the slot. HARDWARE 2.affix the middle portion of the cable to the hooks at the back of ce the rack. e 5.c w Fan motor w Cable w Connector Back plane Fig. Grasp the left and right side of the cable connector attached to the backplane and remove it. The fan motor cable is connected to the backplane. nc (3) (4) . 2. Remove the control section printed circuit board underneath the fan to be replaced. The latch r. At this time. nt 6.c holding the cover in place can be released by prying with the screwdriver in the direction shown in (3) of following figure. Open the upper lid of the control section rack. Since the fan itself is not screwed into the rack.9 HOW TO REPLACE Fan ordering information FAN MOTOR Ordering code Number of units required For 2–slot rack A90L–0001–0378 For 1–slot rack For 1–slot rack A90L–0001–0385#A For 2–slot rack 1. 8. 4. Close the lid until the latch locks. 3. om 2. it can be easily removed. Install the new fan motor.9 Fan Motor Replacement 175 . Guide the fan motor cable through the hole and into the rack. Insert the removed control section printed circuit board. Insert a philips head screwdriver into the hole at the center front of the lid. Attach the fan motor cable to the connector on the back plane.B–62445E/03 2. Open the lid sufficiently and remove the fan motor.

HARDWARE B–62445E/03 2. Each fuse has a small window in which a white mark appears when the MENT IN POWER fuse has blown. find and correct the cause of the failure and replace the fuse.1 Mounting positions of fuses in the power supply unit Table 1.5A A60L–0001–0245#GP75 F3 5A A60L–0001–0075#5. and table 1 shows the fuse lists.2 w F4 5AS A60L–0001–0046#5.0 w F4 5AS A60L–0001–0046#5. 176 .2. FUSE REPLACE.10 When a fuse blows in the power supply unit of the CNC. 1 shows the fuse mounting diagram. om Fuse F1 r.5A A60L–0001–0245#GP75 F3 3. Parts specifications supply bol pac- ity w AI A02B–0200–K100 F1 7. Uses of each fuse Sym.0 Table 2.2A A60L–0001–0075#3. Uses bol F1 For inputting 200VAC F3 For power supply of 9Imonochrome CRT or LCD F4 For I/O unit.c Battery case e nt PIL ALM Fuse F3 Fuse F4 ce nc Fig. SUPPLY UNIT Fig. etc.0 BI A02B–0200–K101 F1 7. Fuses .c Power Specifications Sym.Ca.

5 Insert the filter in the cover. press wash with a neutral detergent.B–62445E/03 2.c 2 Detach the filter cover and take out the filter inside. Air filter cleaning and replacement om Air filter cleaning and replacement method 1 When cleaning and replacing the filter.11 It is necessary to regulary clean the heat transformer. r. 177 . nc . e nt ce 3 Protect the filter from silting due to dust by blowing air on both sides. rinse with fresh water. The MAINTENANCE OF frequency of the cleaning needed differs according to the installation HEAT PIPE TYPE environment and therefore should be determined by your own judgment HEAT EXCHANGER accordint to the degree of dirt. the flanges which are in the grooves of both sides towards the inside by minus screwdriver. When w replacing with the same product. Confirm that the cover will not come loose even if it is pulled. align the flange in the groove. be sure to cut off the fan’s electric power source. etc. HARDWARE 2.c w 4 When dirt is conspicuous. and the washing. because the heat transformation ability will be reduced by the accumulation of dust. and install w by pressing. Detach the cover by pressing. allow to dry naturally.

Also detach installation screws (B).2.. soak a cloth in neutral detergent. 2 Take out the external fan unit from the heat exchanger main unit. Heat exchanger main unit om Power cable for fan (detach the connector) External fan unit e r.c 1 Wipe the dirt. be sure to cut off the fan power source. etc. lightry sqeeze it and wipe away the dirt. it can be taken out) ce Detach the two installation screws (A) of the external fan unit. When the w condensation. take care not to allow the detergent to enter the electrical sections such as the internal rotor of the fan motor. etc. w 178 .c nt Installation screws B (1) Installation screws A (2) Earth cable (if the installation screw on the fan side is detached. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 Cleaning heat exchanger Cleaning heat exchanger 1 When cleaning. and detach the unit from the main unit by sliding it down. etc. condensation. which has accumulated on the fan motor and fan installation case with a dry cloth. w However. has accumulated and the dirt is difficult to remove. Detach the power source cable to the fan and the earth cable.  Cleaning fan unit nc Method of cleaning fan unit .

c Main unit Terminal unit and cable e nt ce nc 2 Using a neutral detergent. the terminal unit.c 3 After cleaning. 179 . At this time. do not forget to connect the fan power cable and the earth cable. condensation. At this time. take care not to bend the fin of the element.  Installation w Method of installation after cleaning w After completing cleaning of the fan unit and heat transformer. wipe off with a dry cloth. dry well. om When the dirt is especially severe 1 Detach the internal fan unit. remove the dirt from the main unit fan section by brushing. HARDWARE  Cleaning heat exchanger fan Method of cleaning heat exchanger fan 1 Detach the heat exchanger format the unit and either blow off with air.B–62445E/03 2. and the cable from the main unit. or brush the accumulated dirt. . r. 2 Install the fan unit in the original position. etc. w 1 Install the terminal unit and cable in the original position.

c  Tuning flicker (TM1) If the display flickers. set TM1 to another position. CRYSTAL DISPLAY  Tuning locations Color Liquid Crystal Display(Rear Part) om TM1 SW1 r.2. HOW TO REPLACE This setting is required for each NC unit and the cables used to display THE COLOR LIQUID max. 2 Adjust SW1 to the location where whole object is displayed. ce Usually it is not required to tune this setting. etc. quality. except above descriptions. because the most suitable position has been set before shipment. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 2. nc . that fits a screen.  Setting display position in horizontal direction nt 1 Screen display can be moved by dot unit in horizontal direction. There is only one location.12 The color liquid crystal display is provided with a setting switch tuner for precisely adjust video signal. Doing so usually e eliminates the flicker.c w w w 180 .  Others Do not change setting or the volume.

REPLACING THE LCD FUSE  Location of the LCD fuse Fuse FS1 om LCD Unit (Rear view) r. (2) Pull the old fuse up.0 A In–house code : A60L–0001–0290#LM50 ce nc .B–62445E/03 2. Then.13 This section describes the location and replacement of the LCD fuse. HARDWARE 2.c w w w 181 . first find and eliminate the cause. e (3) Push a new fuse into the fuse holder. replace the fuse.  Ordering information Ordering code : A02B–0200–K103 * nt Rating : 5.c  Replacing the fuse (1) If the fuse blows.

000 hours BAKLIGHT guaranteed).c w w w 182 . r.) Upon reaching the end of its service life. the backlight should maintain a brightness exceeding 50% of that when new. Replace the unit in which the LCD backlight is mounted. HARDWARE B–62445E/03 2. the POS key). the POS key). press any function key (for example. REPLACING THE LCD The LCD backlight has a life of about 10.c Restoring the screen display Press any function key (for example.000 hours (5. the LCD backlight unit must be replaced. Remark) When the screen display is not required.14 The LCD backlight must be replaced periodically. om Doing so will increase the useful life of the backlight. e nt ce nc . the display and backlight can be turned off by pressing a key. (During its lifetime.2. The unit can be replaced either by the user or by a FANUC service engineer. Suppressing the screen display While holding down the CAN key.

. . . . .3 INPUT/OUTPUT SUPER CAP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . you must set various data again. om the part programs and the tool offset values. . . . . 208 nt ce nc . . 207 3. . . . . . . . . INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 3 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA After you change a SRAM module. 184 3. . . .5 DUMP / RESTORE OF CAP–II DATE (16–T) . . 186 r. 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 INPUTTING/OUTPUTTING CAP–II DATA (16–T) . . . . . .c w w w 183 . . . . . . . 195 3. . . . This chapter describes the procedures to input and output the parameters. .B–62445E/03 3. . . 205 e 3. . . . . .6 CLEARING CAP–II DATE (16–T) . . . . . . . .2 INPUTTING/OUTPUTTING DATA . . . . .c 3. . . .

parameters 2. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62445E/03 3. After the parameters have been input.c PARAMETER (SETTING) O1234N12345 0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0001 FCV e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0012 RMV MIR X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 nt Y 0 Z 0 B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0020 I/O CHANNEL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ce S 0 T0000 REF **** *** *** 10:15:30 [ F SRH ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][DELETE ][ ] nc To make the cursor display in bit unit. Convenient method 184 . Press OFFSET SETTING key several times or press soft key [SETING] to display SETTING (HANDY) screen. Press RESET to release alram 100. Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and. Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state. 1 Soft key [NO. 6. Press SYSTEM key several times to display the following screen. SRH] : Searched by number.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT  Setting procedure of 1. SRH].3. Press soft key[(OPRT)] and the following operation menu is . set PARAMETER WRITE on the SETTING screen to 0. 5. 7. 4. om 3. Examination) Parameter number → [NO. 7 Soft key [PUNCH] : Parameters are output to reader/puncher interface. press the cursor key or . Here alarm 100 will be displayed. press 1 and INPUT keys in this order. r. w 2 Soft key [ON : 1] : Item with cursor position is set to 1 (bit parameter) 3 Soft key [OFF : 0] : Item with cursor position is set to 0 (bit parameter) w 4 Soft key [+INPUT] : Input value is added to the value at cursor (word type) w 5 Soft key [INPUT] : Input value is replaced with the value at cursor (word type) 6 Soft key [READ] : Parameters are input from reader/puncher interface.c displayed.

) 1234 EOB = EOB = INPUT 0 1234 nt 0⇒ 0 0 1234 1234 0 ce 4 For bit parameters. 2 To set data consecutively. (Ex. After the required parameters are set. . INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 1 To change parameters in bit unit.) 1 1 EOB = EOB = INPUT 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 00011000 00000000 ⇒ 00011000 nc 00000000 000 11000 00000000 00000000 8. e (Ex.2) 1234 EOB EOB 9999 INPUT 0 1234 0 ⇒ r.B–62445E/03 3.c 0 0 9999 0 0 3 To set the same data use = .then the cursor becomes bit length and you can set parameters bit by bit (Bit parameter only).c w w w 185 . press cursor key or .1) 1234 EOB 4567 EOB 9999 INPUT 0 1234 0 ⇒ 4567 om 0 9999 0 0 (Ex. set PARAMETER WRITE to 0. (Ex. use EOB key.

1 : Feed is not output when data is output.3. l 1 : No. w 186 .c Data Output #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0000 ISO e #1 (ISO) 0 : Output with EIA code 1 : Output with ISO code (FANUC cassette) 0020 nt Selection of I/O channel 0 : Channel 1 (JD5A OF MAIN CPU) ce 1 : Channel 1 (JD5A OF MAIN CPU) 2 : Channel 2 (JD5B OF MAIN CPU) nc 3 : Channel 3 (JD5C OF OPTION 1) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0101 NFD ASI SB2 .1 Be sure that data output cannot be done in an alarm status. w #0 (SB2) 0 : No. of stop bits is 1. w #3 (ASI)l 0 : EIA or ISO code is used for input/output data.2 The main CPU memorized the following data. of stop bits is 2.2.c #7 (NFD) 0 : Feed is output when data is output. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62445E/03 3. Outputting the data 1/O device while the CNC is rurnning normally INPUTTING/ (1) CNC paramter OUTPUTTING (2) PMC parameter DATA (3) Pitch error compensation amount (4) Custom macro variable values (5) Tool compensation amount (6) Part program (machining program. Confirming the Parameters required for output are as follows : Parameters Required for r. custom macro program) om 3. 1 : ASCII code is used.

steps 2 and 3 are not required. nt In case of PPR. FSP–H 0103 Baud Rate r.2 Outputting CNC Parameters 2. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [PARAM] to display parameter screen. Press PROG key and soft key PRGRM to select a program text. ce PROG 3.B–62445E/03 3. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC]. FANUC FA card adapter .c 1: 50 5: 200 9: 2400 2: 100 6: 300 l10: 4800 3: 110 7: 600 11: 9600 4: 150 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS] e 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 0102 pecification number of input/output device 0 RS–232–C (control codes DC1 to DC4 used) 1 FANUC bubble cassette B1/B2 2 FANUC Floppy cassette adapter F1 3 PROGRAM FILE Mate.2. Select EDIT mode. Press soft key [(OPRT)] . FSP–H 4 Not used om 5 Portable tape reader 6 FANUC PPR. FSP–G. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and soft key .c 6. And then.FANUC Floppy cassette adapter. 1. put out the head of file by pressing [FSRH] 0 [EXEC]. .and the parameters are started to be output. 5. w w w 187 .and soft key . nc 4.

Press SYSTEM key and soft key [PMC]. Set the cursor to K17 and set the first bit to 1. 17. Press OFFSET SETTING key then soft key [SETTING] to select a setting screen. ce 11. Press soft key then key . mark x is a former value Thus.Press soft key [EXEC]. Parameters 2. data input/output screen r.4 Outputting Pitch Error 1.c has been selected. Press soft key [I/O] and set the parameters on I/O. X X X X X X 1 X INPUT Where. Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and input 1 and INPUT. 14. 4. press soft key [WRITE]. 3. set PARAMETER . Item selection cursor moves to the following item after data of an item nt is set.2.c WRITE to 0.3 Outputting PMC 1. specify a file name. 16. press soft key [PARAM].After the PMC parameters have been output. 13. press soft key [FDCAS] to select the floppy cassette. In this example input as follows: nc @ P M C INPUT 15.2.3. Press SYSTEM key several times. input 1 INPUT to select I/O channel 1. e 9.In KIND DATA item. alarm 100 will be generated.In CHANNEL NO item. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC].In FUNCTION item. 8. 4.and [PITCH] to select the SETTING screen for pitch error amount. Select EDIT mode. 12. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62445E/03 3. w Compensation Amount 2. Select EDIT mode. 3. Press soft key [PMCPRM] and soft key [KEEPRL] 6. w w 3. then pitch error compensation amount is started to be output. 7.In FILE No item. 188 . Then PMC parameters are started to be output. om 5.In DEVICE item. Select MDI mode. 10. press soft key [PARAM]. At this time. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and .Press RESET to release alarm 100.

6 r. 3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and then key . Press soft key [PUNCH] an [EXEC] key. 4.c Outputting Tool 1.B–62445E/03 3. 500 and Outputting Custom later are output. 2. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC].5 When custom macro function is equipped. 4. Select EDIT mode. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 3. ce nc . and the tool compensation nt amount is started to be output.c w w w 189 . 3. Press OFFSET SETTING key and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool compensation amount screen. Macro Variable Values 1. Compensation Amount 2. then custom macro variable om values are output.2. values of variable no. Press OFFSET SETTING key.2. Press key and soft key [MACRO] to select custom macro variable screen. e 3. Press [(OPRT)] key and soft key .

Confirm that the patameters required to input data is correct. Input a program number to be output.2. 2.2. e 5.7 Outputting Part Program 1. Press [PUNCH] and [EXEC] key. 4 w 0020 Selectionof I/O channel l 0 : Channel 1 (JD5A of MAIN CPU board) w 1 : Channel 1 (JD5A of MAIN CPU board) 2 : Channel 2 (JD5B of MAIN CPU board) w 3 : Channel 3 (JD5C of Option 1) 190 .c 3. #0 (NE8) l 0 : Programs of 8000s are edited. Select EDIT mode. then program output is started. 1 Press OFFSET/SETTING key several times. To output all programs input as: O – 9 9 9 9 nt 6. Press [(OPRT)] key and press soft key . om 1 : Programs of 9000s can be protected. 2 Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1. Set to the emergency stop state.3. . and press [SETING] to display SETTING screen. If 1 is set. set to the MDI mode and set it to 0. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62445E/03 3. ce 3. 1 : Programs of 8000s can be protected.8 Inputting CNC 1. nc Parameters 2. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3202 NE9 NE8 #4 (NE9) l 0 : Programs of 9000s are edited. Confirm the following parameters. r. Press PROG key and press soft key [PRGRM] to display program text.c 3 Press SYSTEM key to select the parameter screen. 4.

) 1 FANUC Bubble cassette B1/B2 2 FANUCFloppy cassette F1 e 3 PROGRAM FILE Mate. #0 (SB2) 0 : No. FSP–H ce 7 0103 Baud rate 1: 50 5: 200 9: 2400 300 l10: 4800 nc 2: 100 6: 3: 110 7: 600 11: 9600 4: 150 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS] 3. FSP–G. turn off the power once then turn it on. 1 : Feed is not output when punching out. After the parameters have been input. FANUC Floppy casette adapter. of stop bits is 2. 191 . INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 5 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0101 NFD ASI SB2 #7 (NFD) 0 : Feed is output when punching out. Then input of parameters are started. om l 1 : No.B–62445E/03 3. Because alarm 300 will generate for the system with absolute pulse w coder. #3 (ASI) 0 : EIA or ISO code is used. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC]. FANUC Handy File nt 4 5 6 RS–232–C ( Control codes DC1 to DC4 are not used) Portable tape reader FANUC PPR. FSP–H. 5. 6. w 1 : Position detector is absolute pulse coder. set parameter 1815#5 to 0. FANUC FA Card adapter. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 w 1815 APCx #5(APCx) 0 : Position detector is other than absolute pulse coder. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and soft key .c 4.c 0 RS–232–C (control codes DC1 to DC4 are used. of stop bits is 1. 6 0102 Specification number of I/O device r. 1 : ASCII code is used.

Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC]. 8. Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1. 3. soft key [PARAM].3.2. 11. Press key and key. and 3 [EXEC] to select the pitch error compensation file. 2. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key.After data has been read.In DEVICE item. [F SRH].c 7. Press soft key [I/O] and set the parameters required for I/O.9 Set the emergency stop state. Press key and soft key [PMC].In FUNCTION item. 6. e 9. w 5. 3. 2. Press OFFSET SETTING key and soft key [SETTING] to select the SETTING screen. Parameters 1. Press PROG key and soft key [PRGRM] to display program contents.Press soft key [EXECT] and the PMC parameters are started to be input. press OFFSET SETTING key twice to display the SETTING screen and return the PARAMETER WRITE to 0. w 4. press [FDCAS] key to select the floppy cassette. Release the emergency stop and select EDIT mode. Item selection cursor displays the next item after an item is set. press soft key [READ] to input data ce 12. om SYSTEM 5. 13. press 2 INPUT to select file no. then the pitch error compensation amount is started to be input. 6. 4.c Compensation Amount 1. nc 14. Press soft key [PMCPRM] and soft key [KEEPRL].10 Inputting Pitch Error . 7. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62445E/03 3. 8. 2.2. Press SYSTEM key several times. Inputting PMC Operation of 12 is not required when PPR is used. r. 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 INPUT . . Turn off (KEY4=1) the program protect key. Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1 on the setting screen. Set the cursor to K17 and set bit 1 to 1. Press soft key [(OPRT)]. nt 10. and [PITCH] to select the screen for pitch error compensation amount. In CHANNEL item . After data has been input. w 3. turn off power and turn it on. 192 .In FILE NO item. press 1 INPUT to select channel 1.

2. 4. and [EXEC] to select the tool compensation amount file. 3. [F SRH]. input the Inputting Custom Macro variable values. 4. Input a program number that is not used. To set vacant. 3. Press 500 and soft key [NO SRH] to display variable number 500 and ce confirm the custom macro variables are set correctly. Press PROG key then soft key [PRGRM] to display program contents. Press OFFSET SETTING key. then custom macro variable values are r.c 12. Of the data displayed.2.Press address O and a program number (0001 for example) . soft key [READ] and [EXEC] key. Turn off the program protect key (KEY2=1). and press soft key[PRGRM] to display the program contents screen. 193 . macro variables are set.B–62445E/03 3. e When the program is executed. Confirm that EDIT mode is selected. Compensation Amount w 2. w w 3. . .Press PROG key to select the program display screen. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key . Select the EDIT mode. macro variable screen. item 4 is not required. key and soft key [MACRO] to select the custom 9. . 6. 0 and vacant differ in meaning. [F SRH]. Press address O. and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool compensation amount screen. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 3. 2. nt 8. nc 10.c started to be input. Select MEMORY mode on the machine operator’s panel and press cycle start button. Inputting Tool 1. press soft key [INPUT]. Press soft key [(OPRT)]. and X [EXEC] to select om a file. Press PROG key. 11. a program number (0001 for example).11 If the system is equipped with the custom macro fucntion.Select EDIT mode again. For PPR. Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Vacant is an undefined variable. Press OFFSET SETTING key. 5. Variable Values 1.12 Item 4 is not required for PPR.then press DELETE to delete the program. 7. 5. Turn off the program protect (KEY=1).

INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62445E/03 6. If 1 is set. M02. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key. 1 : Programs of 8000s are protected. e #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3202 #4 (NE9) nt NE9 NE8 l 0 : Programs of 9000s can be edited.M30 and M99 are: 0 : regarded as the end of program. Confirm that mode is EDIT mode. and X [EXEC] to select a part program file. . 7. Press PROG key and press soft key [PRGRM] to select a part program file. Turn off the program protect (KEY3=1).[(OPRT)] and key.3. l 1 : not regarded as the end of porgram. Press soft key .2.c 1. Inputting Part Programs (Change it in MDI mode).13 Confirm the following parameters. w 4. Press soft key [(OPRT)]. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3201 NPE RAL om #6 (NPE) When programs are registered in part program storage area. 1 : Only one program is registered. For PPR. w 5. 194 . item 4 is not required. then data input is started. 3. 6. r. 2. ce 1 : Programs of 9000s are protected. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC]. w 3.c #1 (RAL) When programs are registered: l 0 : All programs are registered. [F SRH]. #0 (NE8) nc l 0 : Programs of 8000s can be edited. set it to 0. Press [READ] key and [EXEC] key and data input is started.

Conversational Data in a Lump(Super CAP M) om 1. DISPLAY AND SET USED SET T–ORDER FOR T–OR. DATA DATA INPUT OR OUTPUT OF DATA PRE– SET DATA OF PRE– TOOLS BEFORE C.c DEF.A.P. DIVIDE DISPLAY THE DIREC- DISPLAY DEFAULT DATA TOLDIR FILE TORY OF DIVIDE TOOLS IN TOOL FILE w DISPLAY A LIST OF TOOL TOOL USED F. 4. Confirm the parameters shown below: P0020: I/O CHANNEL (select I/O device) : 0 P0102: I/O device number : 3 P0103: Baud rate for 4800 bauds : 10 for 9600 bauds : 11 2. 195 .3 INPUT/OUTPUT SUPER CAP DATA 3.P. I/O FILE USED TOOL FILE DRCTRY TOLDIR FILE 5.[Series16] Conversational Data Screen e nt C.P DATA) on the basic menu screen.1 Input/Output of The following operation allows all the data used for Super CAP M to be input and output in a lump.c 3. Select EDIT mode.FILE DATA OF CUTTING DER CHANGE CONDITION w SELECT FROM SOFT KEY < DATA w DEF. Press soft key [8] (C.S.3.B–62445E/03 3. Press soft key [DATA I/O].A. Press function key PROG and press soft key [CAP]. TOOL PRE– TOOL TOOL DIVIDE F. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 3.A.S. ce I/O TOOL PROGRAMMING TOOL DISPLAY AND SET FILE VARIOUS DATA OF TOOLS REGISTERED nc TOOL DISPLAY THE DIREC- DRCTRY TORY OF TOOLS IN TOOL FILE . r.

For read. press soft key [PUNCH EXEC].3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62445E/03 [Series16] Conversational Data Screen DATA I/O @ READ DATA I/O PARA GUIDE READ I/O CHANNEL =0 @ PUNCH EXEC I/O DEVICE NO. nc SELECT FROM SOFT KEYS < FLOPPY READ PUNCH ALL DEF.S. input a file no. nt 8.(Specify a file no.c EXEC FILE w The above operation reads and punches default data.S. Press soft key [ALL DATA]. and press soft key [READ EXEC]. 7. tool file and F. DIR DATA FILE TOOL FILE FILE e 6. pre–tool list. = > ce < FLOPPY PUNCH READ ALL DEF. Press soft key [READ] or [PUNCH]. =3 OR @ ALL CAP DATA PUNCH @ DEFAULT DATA EXEC om @ PRE–TOOL LIST @ TOOL FILE @ CUT COND FILE SELECT FROM SOFT-KEY r. READ FILE NO. DIR DATA FILE TOOL FILE . for all data). DIR DATA FILE TOOL FILE FILE EXEC ⋅For punch. PRE– TOOL F.c < FLOPPY READ PUNCH ALL DEF. PRE– TOOL F. w w 196 . PRE– TOOL F. file in a lump.S.S.

3. press [PUNCH EXEC]. (Specify file number of tool file).3.(No. (Specify a file number of pre–tool list).S. (6) CAP program: All the CAP program (Cannot input/output individual program) Note You should input/output NC parameters separately. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 3. @ For punching.1. PMC nc Output of CAP data parameters and so on to be input/output from/to a general I/O device such as FANUC cassette adapter or the like. @ For punching.3 This feature allows NC parameters.B–62445E/03 3. FILE). press a file no. pre–tool list and chuck/tailstock figure data.(Specify a file no. FILE. NC programs. press a file number and pres soft key [READ EXEC]. for default data and press soft key [READ EXEC]. press [PUNCH EXEC]. of axes. Input and Output of Each Execute the same operations from step 1 to 6 in the previous section 3.3. @ For punching.c (1) NC parameters: All parameters except for optional parameters and a parameter that specifies the no. S file 7 Press F.S.S. timer and other w data (5) Tool File: All data of tool data file. nt8 @ For reading. F. and press soft key [READ EXEC]. keep relay.2 You can input and output files individually. press a file number and soft key [READ EXEC]. (Super CAP T) 1. (2) Reading or punching pre–tool list om 7 Press PRE–TOOL.c 7 Press TOOL FILE. ce 3. Data that can be input/output . roughness w data. (3) Reading or Punching tool file r. offsets. data. File (1) Reading or Punching default files 7 Press [DEF. press [PUNCH EXEC]. @ For punching. 197 . of F. input a file no. 8 @ For reading. 8 @ For reading. press soft key [PUNCH EXEC]. e (4) Reading or Punching F. FILE]. 1010) w (2) :Offset values: All data of wear/geometry data (3) NC programs: All the NC programs (4) PMC parameters:All data of counter. 8 @ For reading. You can input/output other data in a lump. (Specify a file number of default file).

CAP TOOL FILE 6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62445E/03 2. w w w 198 . @ Channel at NC side=0 @ Stop bit=2 @ Parity=No @ Length of character=8 @ Baud rate=Depends on NC parameter no. data select menu on tool post 2 is not displayed. @ XON/OFF control=Yes (2) Select EDIT mode. NC PARAMETER (HD2) nt2. NC PROGRAM (HD2) 9. 0103. om (3) Display basic menu screen. (4) Press [17] to display the following data I/O menu screen. [Data I/O menu Screen] r. PMC PARAMETER 5. CAP PROGRAM ce nc < READ PUNCH I/O SET UP .c Note For 16–TB. NC PROGRAM (HD1) 4. press [+] key to display the 2 nd page soft keys.c DATA I/O SCREEN [CAP:HEAD-L] SINGLE SINGLE e 1. select screen of tool post 1. For path 2. Operation for inputting/outputting data in a lump (1) Connect external I/O device and set necessary parameters.3. NC OFFSET (HD2) 8. NC PARAMETER (HD1) 7. NC OFFSET (HD1) 3.

c NC NC NC PMC CAP CAP. NC OFFSET(HD2) 8. e < NCnt NC NC PMC PARAM OFFSET PROG PARAM CAP TOOL CAP- PROG I/O SET UP PRE–PG SELECT END + (6) Press a soft key corresponding to data to be output. NC PARAMETER (HD1) 7. CAP TOOL FILE 3. PMC PARAMETER om SELECT THE DATA WHICH YOU WANT TO PUNCH OUT < + r. NC OFFSET(HD1) 5.c w w w 199 . nc Note NC parameters can be output only separately. .NC HD2 NC HD2 NC HD2 SELECT PARAM OFFSET PROG PARAM TOOL PROG PARAM OFFSET PROG END Note) For 16/18–TB. If NC parameters are selected to be output with other data. Selected data ce is displayed by reverse character of green color. DATA I/O SCREEN [CAP:HEAD-L] PUNCH SINGLE SINGLE 1. other data is canceled. CAP PROGRAM 4. NC PROGRAM(HD1) 6. NC PARAMETER (HD2) 2.B–62445E/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA (5) Press [PUNCH] and the following screen is displayed. NC PROGRAM(HD2) 9. Select all the data to be output and press [SELECT END]. the following soft keys are displayed.

when [NC PROG] is pressed.When you press this key. NC PROGRAM (HD1) 6. NO: [CANCEL]] ce EXEC CANCEL To execute punching all the programs. the following screen is displayed. NC PARAMETER (HD2) ***HEAD 1*** 00012 00110 00120 2. NC PARAMETER (HD1) 7. press [CANCEL]. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62445E/03 [NC PROG] or [NC HD2 PROG] (For path 2. the following menu is displayed.3. PMC PARAMETER SELECT THE DATA WHICH YOU WANT TO PUNCH OUT r.c < ALL ALL SELECT CANCEL SELECT SELECT CANCEL END e [ALL SELECT] Press this key to output all the programs. press [EXEC] and when it is not needed. < nt EXEC REALLY? YES: [EXEC]. NC OFFSET (HD2) 8. nc . CAP TOOL FILE 00150 00160 om 3.) DATA I/O SCREEN [CAP:HEAD-L] PUNCH SINGLE SINGLE REGISTEREPROGRAMS 1. CAP PROGRAM 4. NC OFFSET (HD1) 5. NC PROGRAM (HD2) 9.c w w w 200 .

INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA [ALL CANCEL] Press this key to cancel outputting all the data. NC PROGRAM (HD1) 4. press [EXEC]. (7) The following screen is displayed when you press [SELECT END].c DATA I/O SCREEN [CAP:HEAD-L] PUNCH SINGLE SINGLE e 1. When this key is pressed.c right corner of the screen. Therefore. CAP TOOL FILE 6. NC PARAMETER (HD1) 7. When data outputting finishes. w 2 Data format is different between 16–TB and 16–TTB. NC PARAMETER (HD2) nt 2. If outputting finishes with an error w generated. the same soft key as when [ALL SELECT] is pressed is displayed. 201 . output data by this function cannot be used for inputting. press [CANCEL]. to cancel cancelling. Notes w 1 The data format output by the above data input/output in a lump funciton is different from the data format input/output in an individual operation. the data is shown in blue color. 3 The data that can be input by the input/output in a lump function is limited to data output by the same function. NC OFFSET (HD1) 3. [SELECT] When you specify a NC program to be punched. 4 The range of PMC parameters to be output can be specified by the following NC parameter. [CANCEL] To cancel outputting NC programs. om [SELECT END] When you finsh specification of punching. press this key. NCOFFSET (HD2) 8. The data being output is indicated by blinks of yellow reverse characters. To start punching. PMC PARAMETER 5. press [EXEC] and to cancel punching. r. press this key. CAP PROGRAM ce EXEC REALLY? YES: [EXEC] NO [CANCEL] nc < I/O EXEC CANCEL SET UP When data punching starts. press [CANCEL]. To execute cancelling.B–62445E/03 3. the data is shown in red. move the cursor to the program number and press this key. NCPROGRAM (HD2) 9. “OUTPUTTING” blinks on the lower .

3. 1) NC parameter : Set setting data “PARAMETER WRITE” to 1. Select Head 1 screen for path 2. counters.3. 3) NC program : Turn off program protect (KEY3=1). Select EDIT mode. Connect an I/O device and set the corresponding parameters required as the same as output operation. 2.9090(PMCIOS) > No. 3. r. No. Set optional parameters required and the parameter for setting the number of axes (parameter no.9091(PMCIOE) : D area data of PMC parameters from the specified starting address number to the ending address number are output. 4) PMC parameter : Set setting data “PARAMETER WRITE” to 1. No.c 2) Offset amount : Turn off protection of offset data (KEY1=1).9091(PMCIOE) : 0 : D area data (one data) of the specified address number is output.3 can be input in a lump by the following operation.9091(PMCIOE)=0 : All the PMC parameters including keep relays. nc 3.3.c No. Release protection according to each data to input. No. 4. timers and data are output. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62445E/03 NC parameter 9090 PMCIOS PMCIOS :The start address number of D area of the PMC parameters to be output. ce (Super CAP T) 1. om No. w 5) Tool File : Turns off offset data protection (KEY1=1) 6) CAP program : Turns off program protect (KEY3=1) w w 202 . .9090(PMCIOS) < No.9090(PMCIOS)=0.4 Inputting CAP data nt The data output by the input/output in a lump function mentioned in 3.9090(PMCIOS)=No. 9091 PMCIOE PMCIOE :The end address number of D area of PMC parameters to be output. 1010) beforehand.9091(PMCIOE) e : All the data in D area are output.

Press [READ] and the following screen is displayed. DATA I/O SCREEN [CAP:HEAD-L] READ SINGLE SINGLE 1. if w other data than parameters is specified. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 5. press . However. EXEC REALLY YES: [EXEC] w NO. CAP TOOL FILE 3. NC PARAMETER(HD1) 7. NC OFFSET (HD2) 8. w 9. CAP PROGRAM om 4. [CANCEL] < I/O EXE CAN- SET C CEL UP 203 . NC PARAMETER(HD2) 2.[OTHERS]. To input other data than NC parameters. 2 When the I/O device is other than FANUC Cassette adapter. data select menu on HEAD 2 is not displayed. The selected data is shown in green reverse character. press [OTHERS]. 7. nc When the FANUC Cassette adapter is used.c [NCHD2 PARAM] to input the NC parameters on HEAD 2.c < NC OTH- NC HD2 I/O PRE– EXE PARAM PARAM PARAM PG C ERS e Notes nt1 For path 1. the data actually read is unknown and all the data is shown in green reverse character. NC OFFSET (HD1) 5.and [NC HD2 ce PARAM] are not displayed. it is not needed to execute this operation. PMC PARAMETER SELECT THE FILE WHICH YOU WANT TO READ r. since the data is called automatically. soft keys [NCPARAM].B–62445E/03 3. NC PROGRAM (HD1) 6. Press [EXEC] and the following soft keys are displayed. Rewind the data to its head when an I/O device other than FANUC Cassette adapter is used. Display the DATA I/O menu screen 6. 8. Press [NC PARAM] to input the parameters on the HEAD 1. NC PROGRAM (HD2) 9.

if an error occurs. it is indicated by blue.Press [EXEC] to start data reading or press [CANCEL] to cancel data inputting.c nt ce nc .3. While the data is input. When data is input correctly. “INPUTTING” is displayed on the lower right of the screen. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62445E/03 10. The data other than NC parameter can be input in a lump if those data was output in a lump.c w w w 204 . The data being input is shown in yellow by reverse character in blinking. om e r. the data is displayed in red.

SYSTEM DATA SETTING 2. SYSTEM PARAMETER OUTPUT 3.c **FAMILY PROGRAM** **PARAMETER & DATA SET** 1. SYSTEM PARAMETER INPUT : : w : (REFER TO TABLE 3) 205 . SETTING DATA CORRECTION : 3.B–62445E/03 3.c w **SYSTEM DATA SETTING & OUTPUT/INPUT** w 1. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 3. MATERIAL DATA CORRECTION : : : nt : : ce 4 or 5 INPUT 1 INPUT nc (REFER TO TABLE 1) (REFER TO TABLE 2) . FAMILY PROGRAM INPUT e 2. SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTING 2. FAMILY PROGRAM OUTPUT 1.4 INITIAL SCREEN INPUTTING/OUTPUTT Symbolic ING CAP–II FAPT TURN DATA(16–T) om PRESS [FAMILY PRESS [DATA PROGRAM] SET] KEY r.

parameter no. n ”INPUT” ”INPUT” 1”INPUT”⇒”SAVE ENDY 5”INPUT”⇒”SAVE ENDY ce Input/ Tool data 11.. n ”INPUT” n=P⇒FANUC PPR Input n=B⇒FANUC Cassette Sub cycle 5. n ”INPUT” on w Tool data 12. n ”INPUT” gis- Setting 13.c n=C⇒Sub Memory Output Material data 4. n ”INPUT” put/ Re. n ”INPUT” n=P⇒FANUC PPR n=B⇒FANUC Cassette r. n ”INPUT” Collati MTF 8. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62445E/03 [TABLE 1] Input/Output of Family Program”INPUT” I/O Item Operation on I/O Remarks device Family program 2. n ”INPUT” 9”INPUT”⇒”SAVE ENDY Read Setting 14. n ”INPUT” n=P⇒FANUC PPR System parameter 2. [Table 3] Input/Output of system parameters and other data. 15 becomes valid. Tool data 10. n ”INPUT” w w 206 . n ”INPUT” n=C⇒Sub Memory Family program 1. n ”INPUT” n=B⇒FANUC Cassette nc Out- MTF 6.3. n ”INPUT” System parameter 4. n ”INPUT” *When n is omitted.c tion Graphic data 15. n ”INPUT” *When n is omitted. p parameter Output no. n ”INPUT” [TABLE 2] Input/Output of Material Data om I/O Item Operation on I/O Remarks device Input Material data 5. 15 becomes valid. e I/O Item Operation on I/O Remarks device nt System parameter MTF 3. n ”INPUT” Graphic data 16. Sub cycle 4. n 7. n ”INPUT” tera- .

c  Inputting data (Restore) 1. CYCLE) 7.2 nt Operation  Outputting data (Dump) ce 1. 3. To input data from FANUC Cassette. P INPUT .5. w 2. press keys as follows: [AUXILIARY]⇒ D U M P . Files Family program (FAPT–FAMILY) r.1 Kind of Data in Sub 1. B INPUT w To input data from FANUC PPR. Initial screen registration command data e 3.5 The sub memory is stored in RAM module on the Option 3 board (board for CAP–II). B INPUT nc Be careful that data is memorized from top of the file. To output data on FANUC Cassette. press keys as follows: [AUXILIARY]⇒ D U M P . INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 3.5. press keys as follows : [AUXILIARY]⇒ R S T R . press keys as follows : [AUXILIARY]⇒ R S T R . System parameter (FAPT–SYS.) Memory 2. MTF (FAPT–MTF) om 3. To output data on FANUC PPR. 207 . Graphic data (FAPT–GRAPHIC) 6. 2. Tool data Turning tool (FAPT–TOOL) C axis tool 5.c Material file (FAPT–MATERIAL) Sub cycle file (FAPT–SUB. Hold SP key and turn on power. Turn off the power once. Setting data (FAPT–SETTING) 4.B–62445E/03 3. which is used when Option 3 board or RAM CAP–II DATA (16 – T) module is replaced. P INPUT w 3. The procedure below describes a method to input and output DUMP/RESTORE OF the data in sub memory. Display the screen of Symbolic FAPT TURN. PARAM.

ce No Delete a file ? nc Yes Meet the cursor to a no.c ”Family program” menu PARAMETER & DATASET” screen menu key e Press [FILE NAME] key nt File name list stored in submemory Not only file names of family programs. to be Press [END] deleted using .1 Deleting File Name and Symbolic FAPT TURN Files (Initial screen) om Press [Family program] Press [DATA SET] key key r.c VCURSOR⇓WorVCUR- SOR⇑Wkey w DEL INPUT EOB .3. w YES(Delete) NO(Not delete) w Delete really ? 1 . INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62445E/03 3. INPUT 208 . INPUT 0 .6 CLEARING CAP–II DATA (16 – T) 3. but also file names and sub cycle files are dis- played.6.

Press SP while turning on power.B–62445E/03 3.2 1.   . INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA 3.6.

c nt ce nc .  2. Press [AUXILIARY]and press Memory C F I N T INPUT om e r.c w w w 209 .

magnetics cabinet and the PMC. . . .4. . .5 SIGNAL AND SYMBOL CORRESPONDENCE nt TABLE . It also describes a method of inputting/outputting PMC parameters to an external device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . connection of the signals between PMC om and CNC. . . . . . . . . It also describes system configuration of PMC. . . . . . 211 4. . . . . . . . .c 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 LIST OF SIGNALS BY EACH MODE . . . . . .3 PMC SCREEN . . . . 212 4. . . . . 237 4. 239 ce nc . . . . . . . . . . .1 GENERAL OF INTERFACE . . . INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03 4 INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC This chapter describes the signals between the machine operator’s panel. 218 e 4. . . . .c w w w 210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ladder and how to display time chart of the signals on the CRT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . parameters of PMC. . . . . . . and confirmation method of on/off state of these signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 SPECIFICATION OF PMC . r. . . . . . . . . .

5 Y0.7 Y1000.0 to Y1014.0 G007. 24V Close GENERAL OF w NC PMCDGN PMCDGN * DI/DO PMC–RB/RC MT (Machine Tool builder) w G 0000 ~ 0191 X 0000 ~0127 ST1 DOOR ST ST1 G X RV X0. . +MIT  (T series) [1] . ESKIP.1 B–62445E/03 w High–speed processing signal PMCDGN Input Contacts [0] . 0V Open INTERFACE *DEC  *ESP. . ZAE.c om 4. SKIP.7 r. . XAE.7 System reserve 2nd sheet area X1020. . . .0 to X1019. Off 24V Off FANUC decides PMC address MTB decides addresses addresses [1] . 4. ESKIP. . .INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC .7 Y1020. YAE.7 Power STL STL supply F0.1 X0. . .0 to Y1034. ZAE (M series) *DEC  *ESP.2 ST2 ST2 . On 0V On nt and signals Internal relay and signals correspondence Variable timer Counter Data table e *1) If I/O unit is added: Message display 1st sheet Keep relay X1000. SKIP. XAE. .1 Load + nc 211 F Y – PMCDGN PMCDGN * 0V 0V F 0000 ~ 0141 Y 0000 ~ 0127 ce PMCDGN Tr Output Load [0] .0 to X1039. .c 0V +24E X5.

896KB 14 kinds ce (Function) 48 kinds 67 kinds 67 kinds 69 kinds 69 kinds Internal relay (R) 1100 byte 1618 byte 3200 byte 1618 byte 3200 byte Message request (A) 25 byte 25 byte 125 byte 25 byte 125 byte Non–volatile nc S Var. 3. 312 point max. max.000 Approx.10 0.c Program capacity S Ladder (step) Approx.000 Approx. max. 24.c Subprogram (P) – 512 programs 2000 programs 512 programs 2000 programs Label (L) – 9999 labels 9999 labels 9999 labels 9999 labels Fixed timer Timer No. Sequence program storage Flash memory Flash memory Flash memory Flash memory Flash memory media 212 . 5. max.000 Approx. devices speci. 240 point max. max. devices speci. 100 w devices speci. devices speci.000 e Approx.000 S Symbol/comment (Note 1) 1 to 128KB 1 to 128KB 1 to 128KB 1 to 128KB 1 to 128KB S Message S Language only Instruction (Basic) 0.000 Approx. 16. devices speci- fied fied fied fied fied Input/output w S I/O Link (I) 1024 points 1024 points 1024 points 1024 points 1024 points max. 312 point max. 24. 100 Timer No.000 Approx. 240 point max. max.000 Approx.000 Approx. 16.4. (Note 2) (O) 240 point max.000 Approx.000 Approx. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03 4. 12. 24.000 Approx. 312 point max. max. 16.000 Approx.1 to 64KB 14 kinds 0. 8.000 Approx.1 Specification Model PMC–RA1 PMC–RB3 PMC–RB4 PMC–RC3 PMC–RC4 Programming method lan.0 0. Timer (T) 80 byte 80 byte 300 byte 80 byte 300 byte S Counter (C) 80 byte 80 byte 200 byte 80 byte 200 byte S Keep relay (K) 20 byte 20 byte 50 byte 20 byte 50 byte S Data table (D) 1860 byte 3000 byte 8000 byte 3000 byte 8000 byte . S I/O card (I) 312 point max. 100 Timer No. max.000 Approx.1 to 64KB 14 kinds 0. Ladder Ladder Ladder Ladder C Ladder C om guage Step sequence Step sequence Number of ladder level 2 2 2 3 3 Level–1 Cycle Time 8 ms 8 ms 8 ms 8 ms 8 ms Basic Instruction Execution 5. (O) 1024 points 1024 points 1024 points 1024 points 1024 points w max. 240 point max. 16.1 Time (µs/step) (µs/step) (µs/step) (µs/step) (µs/step) r. 5.1 to 64KB max.000 Approx. 8. 5. 12.0 1. 312 point max.2 SPECIFICATION OF PMC 4. 100 Timer No.1 to 64KB 12 kinds nt 0.2. 100 Timer No. max. 240 point max. 896KB 14 kinds 0. 24.1 to 64KB max.0 1.

2 Address om Model Ch Character Si Signal lddescription i i FS–18B FS–16B/18B PMC–RA1 PMC–RB3 PMC–RB4 PMC–RC3 PMC–RC4 r. and 2. size of a symbol and a comment are each 64KB. 4. a comment. when two sheets of I/O cards have been mounted. respectively.c C Counter C0XC79 C0XC79 C0XC199 C0XC79 C0XC199 K0XK39 K0XK39 K Keep relay K0XK19 K0XK19 K900XK909 K0XK19 K900XK909 w D Data table D0XD1859 D0XD2999 D0XD7999 D0XD2999 D0XD7999 T Variable timer T0XT79 T0XT79 T0XT299 T0XT79 T0XT299 w L Label number L1XL9999 L1XL9999 L1XL9999 L1XL9999 w P Subprogram number P1XP512 P1XP2000 P1XP512 P1XP2000 213 . and a message are 32KB. Max.B–62445E/03 4.1KB.points.2. 2 These points are max.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC Notes 1 Normal size of a symbol.c Input signal from the ma- X0XX127 X0XX127 X0YX127 X0XX127 X0XX127 X chine to the PMC (MT to X1000XX1013 X1000XX1019 X1000YX1019 X1000XX1019 X1000XX1019 PMC) Output signal from the PMC Y0XY127 Y0XY127 Y0XY127 Y0XY127 Y0XY127 e Y to the machine (PMC to MT) Y1000XY1013 Y1000XY1014 Y1000XY1014 Y1000XY1014 Y1000XY1014 F Input signal from the NC to the PMC (NC to PMC) nt F0XF255 F1000XF1255 F0XF255 F1000XF1255 F0XF511 F1000XF1511 F2000XF2511 G0XG511 F0XF255 F1000XF1255 F0XF511 F1000XF1511 F2000XF2511 G0XG511 ce G0XG255 G0XG255 G1000X G0XG255 G1000X Output signal from the PMC G G1000X G1000X G1511 G1000X G1511 to NC (PMC to NC) G1225 G1225 G2000X G1225 G2000X G2511 G2511 R0XR999 nc R0XR1499 R0XR2999 R0XR1499 R0XR2999 R Internal relay R9000X R9000XR9117 R9000XR9199 R9000XR9117 R9000XR9199 R9099 A Message request signal A0XA24 A0XA24 A0XA124 A0XA24 A0XA124 .

3 Built–in Debug Function Contents Function Display of sequence pro. WINDR.2. (3) R9002 to R9005 (Operation output registers for the DIVB functional w instruction) The data remaining after the DIVB functional instruction is executed in output. For RA1/RB3/RB4. and MMC3W functional instructions) . 214 . MMCWR. and COMPB functional instructions) ce #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 of Internal Relay R9000 V N Z Operation result register nc Zero Sign is minus Overflow (2) R9000 (Error output for the EXIN. SUB.c S Data table Sequence program edit Ladder diagram editing function (This feature is integrated in PMC–RC3/RC4. MULB. a ladder edit module is re- e quired) 4.2. WINDW. DIVB.4 System Reserve Area nt (1) R9000 (Operation output register for the ADD.c #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 R9000 w The instruc- tion ended in w error. MMCWW.4. MMC3R. Dynamic display of ladder diagram gram Diagnostic function STitle data display S signal status (symbol can be displayed) S PMC alarm display S Signal trace S Memory contents display S Signal waveform display (PMC–RB3/RB4/ om RC3/RC4 only) S Task status display (PMC–RC3/RC4 only) S I/O connection status display Setting and displaying data S Timer S Counter S Keep relay r. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03 4.

c R9026 Addresses of the control data for SUB97 e R9027 nt R9002 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ce R9003 Register for remainder R9004 (used by DIVB instruction) nc R9005 .B–62445E/03 4. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Contents of the com- R9010 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 mand to be executed Data output when R9011 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 the processing is R9012 completed om Addresses of the dcontrol data for SUB90 R9013 R9014 Addresses of the control data for SUB91 R9015 r.c w w w 215 .INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC (4) R9010 to R9027 (Interface area for the FNC9x functional instruction) (PMC–RC3/RC4 only) The area is provided as an interface between the FNC9x functional instruction to be executed and a desired function.

c Cyclic signal of 1 se- cond.c R9116 Addresses of the control data for SUB97 e R9117 nt (6) R9091 (System timer) 4 signals can be used as system timer. ce #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 R9091 nc always OFF always ON Cyclic signal of 200 ms (104 ms ON. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Contents of the com- R9100 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 mand to be executed Data output when R9101 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 the processing is R9102 completed om Addresses of the control data for SUB90 R9103 R9104 Addresses of the control data for SUB91 R9105 r. The specifications of every signal are as following. 96 ms OFF) . 496 ms OFF) w w w 216 . (504 ms ON. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03 (5) R9100 to R9117 (Interface area for the FNC9x functional instruction) (PMC–RC3/RC4 only) The area is provided as an interface between the FNC9x functional instruction to be executed and a desired function.4.

INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC 4.B–62445E/03 4.c Head of 2nd level (2)–n END2 e 3rd level From MT (Display sequence) (PMC–RC/RC3/ nt 8msec END3 RC4 only) ce Period (1) (1) (1) (1) 1st level (2)–1 (2)–2 (2)–n (2)–1 2nd level nc 3rd level .2.5 Execution Period of PMC Sequence program 1st level From NC (High–speed se- (1) quence) END1 2nd level om (Normal sequence) (2)–1 Synchronized buffer (2)–2 r.c w w w 217 .

c The no.3. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03 4. then PMC screen is displayed and the following soft keys are displayed: PMC CONTROL SYSTEM MENU MONIT RUN om SELECT ONE OF FOLLOWING SOFT KEYS PMCLAD : DYNAMIC LADDER DISPLAY PMCDGN : DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION PMCPRM : PARAMETER (T/C/K/D) r. of menus to be displayed changes depending on presence/absence of built–in programmer. Display Method 2.1 1. w PMC–RB3/RB4 PMC–RB3/RB4 PMC–RC3/RC4 (Without memory (With memory card card for editing) for editing) w RUN/ f f f STOP × f f w EDIT I/O f f f SYSPRM × f f X:Cannot be displayed nor used.4.c RUN/STOP : RUN/STOP SEQUENCE PROGRAM When EDIT : EDIT SEQUENCE PROGRAM built–in program- I/O : I/O SEQUENCE PROGRAM mer is run- SYSPRM : SYSTEM PARAMETER ning. 218 . Press soft key [PMC]. MONIT : PMC MONITOR e PMCLAD PMCDGN PMCPRM nt System parameter screen Status display of PMC I/O signal Dynamic display of sequence program ce STOP EDIT I/O SYSPRM MONIT System parameter screen nc Input/output of sequence pro- gram Editing sequence program RUN/STOP of sequence .3 PMC SCREEN 4. Press SYSTEM .

4 *ESP EMERGENCY STOP END1 r. the address of the signal is displayed). w (If symbol is not registered at program preparation time. [SRCH] 5. Use the cursor keys to change display positions.[W–SRCH] w 6. 7. [TOP]:Searches top of ladder.c 4. 9. 1Green (Low brightness) displayContacts :open Relay :off 2. [BOTTOM]:Search bottom of ladder. Functional instruction no. Address. 3.[SRCH] or Signal name.3. .B–62445E/03 4.bit. [SYMBOL]:Signal is displayed by signal name (symbol).[N–SRCH]:Ladder is displayed from the specified net. Net no. [F–SRCH] or Functional instruction name[F–SRCH] w 8.bit.2 Press soft key [PMCLAD]. White (High brightness) display Contacts : closed Relay : on nc  Search method 1. and a sequence program is displayed PMCLAD SCREEN dynamically and operation monitoring can be confirmed : Number of net displayed Ladder display RUN/STOP status LADDER NET 0001–0004 MONIT RUN Comment LOG1 LOG1 ALWAYS1 om LOG1 X008.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC 4. 2. Address. 219 .[W–SRCH] or Signal name . [ADRESS]:Signal is displayed by address and bit no.c PORD POR POWER ON RESET TOP BOTTOM SRCH W–SRCH N–SRCH e nt Other soft keys F–SCRH ADRESS Switched each ce time pressed SYMBOL  Contents displayed 1.

D Dump display on ladder Ladder diagram and signal status dump can displayed together. The stop conditions as a trigger are specified by rising or falling edge detection of the designated signal.WORD]: Long word type display (4 BYTE) “G0000 00001400 00000001 00000000 00000000” ce “G0016 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000” D Parameter display on The value of parameter of a functional instruction is displayed in the ladder diagram functional instruction of a ladder diagram. BG03/06~. repeat the search operation to find plural locations. B305/04~. Because there may exist plural contacts. BG23/03~. But by using this function. (1) [BYTE]: Byte type display (1 BYTE) “G0000 00 14 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00” “G0016 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00” e (2) [WORD] : Word type display (2 BYTE) “G0000 1400 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000” nt “G0016 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000” (3) [D. PAGE PAGE keys or [SEARCH] soft key is used for changing of PMC address. The former ladder diagram display renews signal status every moment. all the ladder diagram at the specified moment can be checked. B105/08~. om diagram The dump is displayed over 2 lines at the last line of ladder diagram by pressing the [DUMP] soft key. 220 . BE03/09~. D Stop of ladder diagram w display by trigger of f : Can be PA1 PA3 RA1 RA2 RA3 RB RB2 RB3 RC RC3 NB used signal (PMC–RB3/RB4/RC3/RC4 × f × × f × × f ∆ ∆ f : Can not be used w ) Note)∆ : Can be used for the specific series of CNC (Series 16: B005/11~. BE09/14~) The ladder display can be stopped by manual operation or trigger of signal. ⋅ If a specified signal is not found up to the end of the program (ladder). BD09/02~. execution returns to the head of a program and search continues. B009/03~) w (Series 18: BD03/12~. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03 [Remarks] ⋅ The search function searches a signal in the forward direction and displays the ladder with the searched signal at its head. r.c The [DUMP] soft key has the follwing functions.c functional instruction.4. repeat the search operation to find plural locations with the specified signal. (2) [NDPARA] : The value of parameter is not displayed in . nc The function of the soft key is as follows: (1) [DPARA] : The value of parameter is displayed in functional instruction.

While the trigger function is being executed. (2) [TRGOFF] : The trigger function is stopped when a specified address signal goes low (is turned OFF). 221 . they are not ce lost even if the power is turned off. depress [TRIGER] soft key to bring the following menu. “MODE:ON : X0000. 0 : 0 : 0001 ” COUNT: Trigger checking number (default 1) POINT: Trigger checking number (default 0) 0 : the top of the 1st level 1 : after END1 execution 2 : after END2 execution 3 : after END3 execution om ADR: Trigger setting address ON: Rising edge detection (TRGON) OFF: Falling edge detection (TRGOFF) r.B–62445E/03 4. condition and counter are displayed at the title line. SEARCH ADRESS TRIGER WINDOW .c RET TRGON TRGOFF START w NEXT w DUMP DPARA TRGSRC INIT w The function of the [TRIGER] soft key is explained below: (1) [TRGON] : The trigger function is stopped when a specified address signal goes high (is turned ON).p1 (trigger point) .p1 . (3) [START] : Pressing this key switches between trigger function execution and trigger function termination.”=”EOB” adr (trigger address) .INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC * Display of setting trigger The setting address. the ”TRG” indication blinks. the trigger function automatically starts when the power is turned on.p2 (trigger checking number (1~65535)) nt * Because parameters are stored in the nonvolatile memory. nc For this operation.c * Setting form adr .p2+[TRGON/TRGOFF]soft key Notes e “. When bit 2 of keep relay K18 is set to 1 after parameters for sampling are specified.

w This function don’t change the size. (The screen returns to normal display. this program is automatically transferred to backup RAM after on–line edit.4. ce The screen in operation is displayed by ”purple” title line. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03 (4) [TRGSRC]: An instruction at which the trigger function has been stopped by a specified address signal is searched for and indicated by blinking. depress [WINDOW] soft key to bring the following menu. For this operation. deletion and chanegable data size) When bit 3 in the keep relay K18 is 1. B contact) S Change address of contact and coil. w S Change the type of contact (A contact. 222 .c The function of the soft key [WINDOW] is as follows: (1) [DIVIDE] : The screen will be divided. e (NET number+[DIVIDE]) (2) [CANCEL] : The dividing display of ladder diagram display nt ends. . If power is off without this operation. D Divided display of ladder This function is used for displaying the divided screen.c D ON–LINE EDIT When bit 1 in the keep relay K17 is 1. S Change address parameter of functional instruction. The dividing display of ladder diagram can be displayed for the designated NET number. w ) When the ladder program is executing. transfer to backup RAM with COPY function of I/O screen. edited data is lost. (5) [INIT] : The trigger setting is initialized. (4) [SELECT] : Change the screen subject to division operation. (7) [SHRINK] : The divided screen is shrank. When bit 3 in the keep relay K18 is 0. nc (5) [WIDTH] : Change the width of division by using [EXPAND] or [SHRINK] soft key. another screen is displayed by “blue” title line. (Cannot be Addition. (6) [EXPAND] : The divided screen is expanded. six division.In monochrome CRT.) (3) [DELETE] : The screen division subject to operation is ended. the screen is displayed by changing brightness. SEARCH ADRESS TRIGER WINDOW om RET DIVIDE CANCEL DELETE SELECT WIDTH r. this function is available and (PMC–RB3/RB4/RC3/RC4 [ONLEDT] soft key is displayed. It can display diagram max. a part of the ladder program can be changed.

ÄÄÄ ÄÄ : : Set when PMC is ÄÄ ÄÄ ÄÄ prepared nc ÄÄ ÄÄ ÄÄ PMC CONTROL PROGRAM SERIES : EDITION : Series and edition of PMC control software MEMORY USED : KB ÄÄ LADDER : KB Memory used and SYMBOL : KB ÄÄ execution time is .c MESSAGE : KB displayed. SCAN TIME : MSEC 2nd page MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME : w MACHINE TOOL NAME : CNC & PMC TYPE NAME : PROGRAM DRAWING NO. : om EDITION NO. PMCDGN SCREEN  TITLE screen The title data registered when a ladder program is prepared is displayed.3 Press soft key [PMCDGN] then PMC’s diagnostic screen is displayed.c MEMORY USED : KB LADDER : KB SYMBOL : KB MESSAGE : KB SCAN TIME : MSEC e SCAN MAX : 016 MS MIN : 008 MS TITLE STATUS ALARM TRACE nt Other soft keys M.3. : Set when PMC is prepared. w 3rd page DATE OF DRAWING : PROGRAM DESIGNED BY : ROM WRITTEN BY : REMARKS : w 223 . : PMC CONTROL PROGRAM SERIES : 4063 EDITION : 08 (SERIES : 4065 EDITION : 08) PMC TYPE CONTROL : RB3 PROGRAM : RB3 r. Page number PMC TITLE DATA #1 MONIT RUN PMC PROGRAM NO. EDITION NO.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC 4.B–62445E/03 4.SRCH ANALYS ce 1st page PMC PROGRAM NO.

refer to nc Appendix 2 List of Alarms. PMC SIGNAL STATUS MONIT RUN ADDRESS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0 Signal G0000 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 name ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8 Signal state G0001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0:Off 1:On ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 G0002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Signal state om G0003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 reverses for FIN signals with *. input an address number or signal name and press [SEARCH].c ALM Blinked w TITLE STATUS ALARM TRACE w w 224 . . INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03  STATUS screen On/Off state of input/output signals and internal relay is displayed.4. ce PMC ALARM MESSAGE MONIT RUN Alarm dis- play ER32 NO I/O DEVICE For details of alarms.c [Search Method] • Page key :Forward and Backward by screen • Cursor key :Forward and Backward by diagnostic number e • To search a specified address or signal name. G0004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0: On 1: Off SEARCH r.  Alarm screen nt Displays an alarm generated in PMC.

set E1 (hexadecimal) to MASK DATA.c T. For example.DISP EXEC e Changes to a trace memory display screen (Screen on the next page) nt a. even if bit 4.c number (2 digits). d. ADDRESS:Set a tracing address. ADDRESS TYPE: 0=PMC address is used for tracing address. w #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 E1% 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 However. the signal status is memorized in the trace memory.3.B–62445E/03 4. nc (Mainly used for C–language program) c. This function is useful for identifying intermittent troubles. tracing (memory w registration) cannot be done but signal status is memorized when a tracing is executed. MASK DATA: The bits to be traced are specified by a hexadecimal . [Correspondence of binary and hexadecimal number] w 00002 : 016 00012 : 116 00102 : 216 00112 : 316 01002 : 416 01012 : 516 01102 : 616 01112 : 716 10002 : 816 10012 : 916 10102 : A16 10112 : B16 11002 : C16 11012 : D16 11102 : E16 11112 : F16 225 .2 and 1 changes.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC  TRACE screen Every time a specified signal changes.6. 1=Physical address is used for tracing address.5 and 0. 1 Trace parameter screen PMC SIGNAL TRACE MONIT RUN TRACE MODE : (0:1BYTE/1:2BYTE/2:WORD) 1STTRACE ADDRESS CONDITION ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY) om ADDRESS : MASK DATA : 2NDTRACE ADDRESS CONDITION ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY) ADDRESS : MASK DATA : r. to trace the signals at bit 7. TRACE MODE: Select the trace mode 0=Records changes of 1–byte signals Select each item by cursor key 1=Records changes of independent 2–byte signals ce 2=Records changes of consecutive 2–byte signals b.

. . . INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03 2 Trace memory contents display screen PMC SIGNAL TRACE MONIT RUN 1ST ADDRESS=X008(E1) 2ND ADDRESS=G000(FF) Trace address NO. .c TRCPRM STOP 10″LCD/14″CRT is dis- played by 1 and 0. . . Soft key [STOP]: Ends the tracing. . . . . . c. . Soft key [EXEC]: Starts tracing. . . . . . . . Trace memory is cleared and each time a specified signal changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ÀÀÀÀ #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 k017 . . . 1 : Tracing starts automatically after power on w w w 226 . . ce Trace memory is 256 bytes and if tracing is executed 128 times by 2–byte tracing. . . . . 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 and mask 0000 . . Soft key [TRCPRM]: Return to the trace parameter setting screen (screen of previous page) nt b. .c #5 0 : Tracing starts by [EXEC]. . * mark : 0 0006 . . . . . . . . . 0008 . . nc ÀÀÀÀ *The tracing parameters are held even if the power is turned off. . data(in pa- rentheses) ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ 0001 I * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 0002 I I * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 0003 ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ * I * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Latest status om 0004 . . I mark : 1 0005 . 0007 . . its status is recorded. . . e a. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . r.4. . . tracing is executed again from the head of memory. . . . . . . . .

......... or [D.. Example) Entering 0F41..5........... Then pressing the [SEARCH] key om displays 256 byte of stored data starting from the specified address. [WORD].......... w SEARCH INPUT w 227 .............. 1000B0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 . 3... PAGE 3) An address can be changed using the or PAGE key...... 100010 4142 4344 4546 4748 494A 4B4C 4D4E 4F50 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP nc 100020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020 100030 5152 5354 5556 5758 595A 2020 2020 2020 QRSTUVWXYZ 100040 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ... e  Function of store To store data in memory.....LTD......... 100060 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 . 1000D0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ... r......................WORD] soft key displays data of the corresponding type...4 Memory display (M.. and enter data in units of data type in hexadecimal.. 2) Enter a physical address in hexadecimal from which the contents of the memory are to be displayed....c 4) Pressing either the [BYTE].. If an address at which the memory is not used is specified....... 1000E0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 .......................... Example) Enter 100000. .... The displayed soft keys also change. 1000A0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ...........B–62445E/03 4. 1000F0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ..INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC 4.. 100050 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 . 100090 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ....3.... move the cursor memory to a position at which the address of the data to be changed in RAM is nt displayed........SRCH)  Display of Screen and Operation 1) Pressing the [M...... then pressing the [SEARCH] keydisplays the contents of the memory starting from 100000H... 100070 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 .. set bit 4 of keep relay K17 to 1.c 100080 4641 4E55 4320 434F 2E2C 5444 0000 0000 FANUC CO......... w 1000C0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ....... then pressing the INPUT key stores ce 0F41 at the address specified by the cursor PMC CONTENTS OF MEMORY MONIT RUN 100000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 . a system error occurs.......SRCH] soft key changes the screen to that shown in Fig..

nt (b) Specifies an address from which recording of signals is started. (c) Set a condition under which recording is initiated. w w w 228 .c 2 : Record signal status before the trigger condition is satisfied.c SCOPE DELETE INIT ADDRESS Select each item by e cursor key (a) Set a sampling time.2 (b) CONDITION : 0 (c) om (0: START 1: TRIGGER–ON 2: TRIGGER–OFF) TRIGGER MODE : 0 (d) (0: AFTER 1: ABOUT 2: BEFORE 3: ONLY) r. .4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03  ANALYS screen Change of signals is displayed as the same display as that on the (PMC–RB3/RB4/RC3/RC4 oscilloscope. ) 1 Parameter setting screen (1st page) (Ladder editing card is required for PMC–RB3/ PMC SIGNAL ANALYSIS(PARAM) MONIT RUN RB4) SAMPLING TIME : 10 (1–10 SEC) (a) TRIGGER ADDRESS : G0007. 0 : Started by soft key [START] ce 1 : Started by rise of a trigger signal after you press the soft key [START] 2 : Started by fall of a trigger signal after you press the soft key [START] nc (d) Set a trigger mode 0 : Record signal status after the trigger condition is satisfied 1 : Record signal status before and after the trigger condition is satisfied. 3 : Record signal status when the trigger condition is satisfied. (Display is same as trace memory).

0 11 : Up to 16 4 : X0005.0 12 : signals 5 : 13 : om 6 : 14 : 7 : 15 : 8 : 16 : SCOPE DELETE INIT ADDRESS r.1 10 : R0000. Soft key [ADDRESS] or [SYMBOL] :Switch addresses and nt symbols for display ce nc .c a.c w w w 229 .B–62445E/03 4.0 2 : X0000. Soft key [INIT] :Initialize parameters of signal waveform display d. Soft key [SCOPE] :Select signal waveform display screen b.1 3 : X0002. Soft key [DELETE] :Delete data on the cursor position e c.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC 2 Parameter setting screen (2nd page) PMC SIGNAL ANALYSIS(PARAM) MONIT RUN SIGNAL ADDRESS 1 : X0000.0 9: Y0000.

g. Soft key [SCALE] : Changes time scale for graphic display. Soft key [T.0 X0005. and to 1024 msec every time you press the w key. Scale changes from 256 to 512.c f. then the signal changes its order. ·Move the cursor to the destination. ce d.0 +---------+---------+---------+------ om 0 256(MSEC) SGNPRM START T.0 X0000. nt (If TRIGGER MODE=3. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03 3 SCOPE screen PMC SIGNAL ANALYSIS(PARAM) MONIT RUN SAMPLING TIME : 10 CONDITION : 1 TRIGGER ADDRESS : G0007.SRCH] :Displayed for a specified time. .4.c The above screen is for a system with graphic display.1 X0002.) c. ·Press soft key [EXCHG] nc ·Move the cursor to a signal to be changed. signal is displayed when you press STOP key.SRCH ADDRESS r. Soft key [START] or [STOP] :Start or stop the record. Soft key [ADDRESS] or [SYMBOL] :Switch addresses and symbols for display e. I and * are used for display if graphic function is not equipped. b. e a. Soft key [EXCHG] : Change order of signals displayed. ·Press soft key [SELECT]. ·Press [TO] and [EXEC]. Soft key [SGNPRM] : Returns to parameter screen. Cursor key : Scrolls time axis forward and backward w w 230 .2 TRIGGER MODE : 0 +---------+---------+---------+------ X0000.

set PARAMETER WRITE or KEY4 on setting ce screen to 0.ADDRESS DATA NO. nc Page no. nt 5 Input a numeric key and press INPUT key and data is input. specified by functional instruction Address specified by ladder . D TIMER screen This screen is used for setting timer time of the functional instruction (SUB 3).c PMC PARAMETER (TIMER) #001 MONIT RUN NO.5   D Inputting PMC parameters from the MDI 1 Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state.ADDRESS DATA 01 T00480 11 T200 Timer w 02 T02960 12 T220 delay time 03 T040 13 T240 (msec) 04 T060 14 T260 w 05 T080 15 T280 06 T100 16 T300 07 T120 17 T320 w 08 T140 18 T340 09 T160 19 T360 10 T180 20 T380 TIMER COUNTR KEEPRL DATA Timer set time : Timer no.c 3 Press a soft key and select a required screen. 1572. 262. 9 is max.8 sec and its accuracy is 48ms. 231 . 1–8 is max.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC 4. Timer no.3. (screen is scrolled by page key) Timer no. 6 After the data is input. 2 Set PARAMETER WRITE (on setting screen) to 1 or set the program protect signal (KEY4) to 1. PWE KEY4 om Timer f – counter f f Either one Keep relay f – Data table f f Either one r.1 sec and its accuracy is 8ms. [TIMER] :Timer screen [COUNTR] :Counter screen [KEEPRL] :Keep relay screen e [DATA] :Data table screen 4 Press cursor key and move the cursor to a desired number.B–62445E/03 4.

c 08 C280 0 09 C320 0 10 C360 0 TIMER COUNTR KEEPRL DATA e Address specified by ladder  KEEP RELAY screen nt Counter number specified by func- tional instruction ce Address specified by ladder PMC PARAMETER (KEEP REALAY) #001 MONIT RUN nc NO. value of counter and current value of the counter instruction (SUB 4). Page no.c 04 K03 00000000 14 K13 00000000 05 K04 00000000 15 K14 00000000 06 K05 00000000 16 K15 ÀÀÀÀ 00000000 ÀÀÀÀ 07 K06 00000000 17 K16 00000000 w ÀÀÀÀ 08 K07 00000000 18 K17 00000000 ÀÀÀÀ 09 K08 00000000 19 K18 00000000 10 K09 00000000 20 K19 00000000 w TIMER COUNTR KEEPRL DATA ÀÀ ÀÀ w Address specified by ladder Used by PMC system 232 .ADDRESS DATA NO.ADDRESS DATA 01 K00 00000000 11 K10 00000000 02 K01 00000000 12 K11 00000000 03 K02 00000000 13 K12 00000000 . re- 06 C200 0 spectively. 07 C240 0 r. (screen is scrolled by page key) Max.) Current value of counter PMC PARAMETER (COUNTER)#001 MONIT RUN NO. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03  COUNTER screen This screen sets and displays max.4. value of counter (Minimum value is specified by counter ins.ADDRESS PRESET CURRENT 01 C00100 1 om PRESET 02 C0450 2 and CUR- 03 C080 0 RENT can be set 04 C120 0 up to 05 C160 0 9999.

e #5TRCSTAT 0 : Signal tracing starts by soft key [EXEC] in signal trace function. 1 : A sequence program is executed by sequence program soft key. #4MEMINP 0 : Data input cannot be done in memory contents display function.c 1 : Dynamic display of ladder is not executed.B–62445E/03 4. ce #2AUTORUN 0 : A sequence program is executed automatically after the power is turned on.c function. ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ om k017 #7DTBLDSP 0 : The PMC parameter data table control screen is displayed. nc #1PRGRAM 0 : Built–in programmer is not used. w w w 233 . 1 : Turning power to on initiates sampling by signal waveform display function. 1 : Data input can be done in memory contents display function. #6ANASTAT 0 : Pressing [EXEC] key initiates sampling by signal waveform display r.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC 1 Nonvolatile memory control ÀÀÀÀÀÀ #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 k016 ÀÀÀÀÀÀ #7(MWRTF2) : For checking the writing status in nonvolatile memory #6(MWRTF1) : Writing status in nonvolatile memory 2 PMC system parameter The following keep relays are used by the system. therefore they cannot be used in the sequence program. 1 : Built–in programmer is used. . #0LADMASK 0 : Dynamic display of ladder is executed. 1 : Signal tracing starts automatically by power on in signal trace ntfunction. 1 : The PMC parameter data table control screen is not displayed.

the screen cannot be switch to w the NC screen using function keys. the CRT is initialized. om 1 : The parity check is not performed for the system ROM and program ROM/RAM.4.c 1 : Function keys are disabled when a user program displays the user screen. 1 : A C–language program is forcibly activated. 1 : The built–in programmer function does not perform RAM parity r. 1 : The trigger stop function automatically starts when the power is turned on. *It is effective for PMC–RC3/RC4 #5CHKPRTY 0 : The parity check is performed for the system ROM and program ROM/RAM. Do not change the values. . Usually all the bits are 0. These bits are status of not used for PMC management software are used by system. the CRT is not initialized. 1 : When the screen is switched to the PCMMDI screen. A program which always sets this bit to 0 or which changes the screen to the NC screen is required. the automatic break processing does not start when the power is turned on. 1 : In the C language debug function. When this bit is set to 1 of the user screen. ÀÀÀ w ÀÀÀ #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 k019 #1C–REJECT 0 : A C–language program is activated. #3TRNSRAM 0 : A ladder program is not automatically sent to the backup RAM after on–line editing is completed. nt #2TRGSTAT 0 : The trigger stop function does not automatically start when the power is turned on. e 1 : A ladder program is automatically sent to the backup RAM after on–line editing is completed. #4CALCPRTY 0 : The built–in programmer function performs RAM parity calculation. the automatic break processing nc starts when the power is turned on. *This flag is effective for the PMC–RC3/RC4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03 ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 k018 #7IGNDINT 0 : When the screen is switched to the PCMMDI screen. w *This flag is effective for the PMC–RC3/RC4.c calculation. ce #1DBGSTAT 0: In the C language debug function. #0IGNKEY 0 : Function keys are enabled when a user program displays the user screen. 234 . *The flag is effective for the PMC–RC3/RC4.

of groups of data table. ce No. [NO. next screen/previous screen can be selected.c G. nc ÀÀÀÀÀÀ PARAMETER ÀÀÀÀÀÀ #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 k019 . e (Next screen) b. of groups is 1. When PMC parameters are set. Soft key [INIT]: Initializes the setting of data table.c 0 : Binary format 1 : BCD format w 0 : Without protection for input 1 : With protection for input w TYPE 0 : 1–byte length 1 : 2–byte length 2 : 4–byte length e.CONT]: Set the no. nt Group No.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC  DATA TABLE screen 1 Data table setting screen No.B–62445E/03 4. of data table NO. of screen PMC DATA TBL CONTROL #001 MONIT RUN GROUP TABLE COUNT = 2 No. PARAMETER is 0000000. d. internal parameters are not affected.ADDRESS PARAMETER TYPE NO. Using the page key. Soft key [G.DATA G. NO.SRH]: Move the cursor to a specified group. ADDRESS is D0000. of data table a. NO. of 005 data table Data length 006 Table 007 parameter 008 Data table head ad- dress r. c.SRH INIT Group no.DATA] : Select data display screen of data table. OF DATA is 1860.OF DATA groups 001D0000 000000000 10 002D0020 000000111 20 003 om 004 No. w 235 . OF GROUPS [G. TYPE is 0.CONT NO. This operation is done usually when a sequence program is prepared.

nt Group No.DATA G–SRCH SEARCH a. [SEARCH]: Searches an address in a group currently ce nc .c C. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03 2 Data display screen Group number Page number PMC PRM (DATA) 001/001 MONIT RUN NO. c. [G–SRCH] : Head of the specified group is selected.c w w w 236 .DATA] :Returns to the data table setting screen. e (Previous screen) b. Soft key [C. Address selected.ADDRESS DATA 000D0000 0 001D0001 0 002D0002 0 003D0003 0 om 004D0004 0 005D0005 0 006D0006 0 007D0007 0 008D0008 0 009D0009 0 r.4.

DNCI (DNC input mode) O *HROV0∼6 M A T I nt HSα1A∼D select) AFL (Handle interrupt axis (Auxiliary function neglect) FIN. TFIN (Spindle MEM (High speed M/S/T function com. 2 (Gear input 16T/ 18T) E RMT *SSTP (Spindle stop) nc R SAR (Spindle speed arrival) A SOR (Spindle orientation) T I [CNC ⇒ PMC] O STL (Cycle start LED) . MFIN2. ETC EDIT [PMC ⇒ CNC] KEY3(Program protect key) om [PMC ⇒ CNC) [PMC ⇒ CNC] ST (Cycle start) *FV0∼7 *SP (Feed hold) (Feed rate SBK (Single block) override) DRN (Dry run) *AFV0∼7 r.) w DEN (Distribution end) OP (automatic operating) GR1O∼GR3O(Gear selection:16M/18M) 237 . search) e U ROV1. SFIN.B–62445E/03 4. M00∼M31 MF2. speed over- O plete) MDI ride) P GR1. TFIN. MFIN3 (Rapid tra- verse over- ride) ce (Auxiliary function complete) SOV0∼7 C MFIN.ROV2. T00∼T31 (Tool function) BF.c N SPL (Feed hold LED) MF.c BDT1∼9 (Block delete) (2nd feed rate MIα (Mirror image) override) STLK (Start lock:16T/18T) OVC CDZ (Chamfering:16T/18T) (Override can- SMZ (In–position check:16T/18T) cel) A PN1∼8 (External program no. B00∼B31 (2nd miscellaneous func.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC 4. M300∼M315 SF.4 LIST OF SIGNALS BY EACH MODE  Automatic operation MODE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL FEED RATE. MINP (External program input) T HROV. S00∼S31 (Spindle speed func- tion) w TF. M200∼M215 (Miscellaneous w function) MF3.

of MP1.4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03  Manual operation MODE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL FEED RATE. ETC Handle/ [PMC ⇒ CNC] [PMC ⇒ CNC] M incremental HSnA∼D (Axis selection) n:1∼3(No.c I N [CNC ⇒ PMC] O *HROV0∼6 ZPα N (Rapid tra- ZP2α. ZP4α verse over- (Reference position return completion) ride) e  Others nt [PMC ⇒ CNC] MD1∼4 (Mode selection) *ESP (Emergency stop) KEY1∼4 (Memory protection key) ce MLK. RLSOT (Software limit external setting M series) *"Lα (Overtravel limit) *"EDα (External deceleration of each axis) w [CMC ⇒ PMC] MA (NC ready) SA (Servo ready) AL (NC alarm) w RST (Resetting) BAL (Battery alarm) INPα (In–position) w MVα (Axis moving) TAP (Tapping) 238 . ZP3α. –α (Jog feed) [PMC ⇒ CNC] A [PMC ⇒ CNC] *JV0∼15 L RT (Rapid traverse) (Manual fee- drate over- om O id ) ride) [PMC ⇒ CNC] P ZRN(Reference position return mode) +α.*ITα (All axes/ each axis machine lock) *"MITα (interlock per axis and direction:M series) STLK (Start lock:T series) *ABSM (Manual absolute) nc SVFα (Servo off) *FLWP (Follow up) ERS (External reset) RRW (Reset & Rewind) Others EXLM (Stored stroke limit external switching) .MLKα (All axes/ each axis machine lock) *IT. MP2 A MPGs) (Multiplier) N U JOG +α.c "LMα. ROV2 R HROV r. –α (Man E ual feed move R [MT ⇒ CNC] command) A Z *DECα (Reference position deceleration) T ROV1.

6 B Axis Unlamp Completion Signal B00∼B31 F030∼033 B Function Binary Code Signal .2 Constant Surface Speed Control Signal CTHαA.7 B Axis Clamp Completion Signal nc *BEUCL G038.0∼7 F007.1 w CON G027.B–62445E/03 4.2 Battery Alarm Signal ntBDT1∼9 BF F044. Actual Spindle Speed Signal F041.0∼7 ARSTA.0 r.0∼7 2nd Feedrate Override Signal AL F001.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC 4.7 Chamfering Signal CHPA.c BFIN G005. Clutch/Gear Selection Signal G074.4 Background Editing Signal w C CDZ G053. Spindle Alarm Reset Signal G075. B F045.5 SIGNAL AND SYMBOL CORRESPONDENCE TABLE SYMBOL PMC address Signal names A *ABSM G006.0. B F046.0 Power Cable Switching Signal F050.7 Cs Axis Contouring Control Signal CSS F002.1 Switch Completion Signal F050. Spindle Alarm Signal F049.0.1 B Axis Clamp Signal BUCLP F061.7 B Function Completion Signal BGEACT F053. F045. B G071. B F046.7 Optional Block Skip Signal B Function Strobe Signal ce BCLP F061.0. B G070.2 Manual Absolute Signal om AFL G005.0 e B BAL F001. 3 239 .0 B Axis Unclamp Signal *BECLP G038.0 w CFINA.0∼7.6 Auxiliary Function Lock Signal *AFV0∼7 G013.c AR0∼15 F040.2.0 Alarm Signal ALMA. 3.2.

4 Emergency Stop Signal ERS G008.0∼7 External Operation Completion Signal External Deceleration Signal ce ESTB G002.0∼7 Controlled Axis Detach Signal r.7 Decoded M00 Signal DM01 F009.4 Spindle Enable Signal e ENB2.5 Follow–up Signal F1D G016.6 Stored Stroke Limit 1/2 Select Signal F FIN G004.3 M. G008.7 Dry Run Signal DTCH1∼8 G124. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03 SYMBOL PMC address Signal names D *DEC1∼8 X009.1 External Read Start Signal w EXLM G007.1 G118.7 Key Enable Signal EXSTP G058. 3 F038.1 Cs Axis Contouring Control Mode Select Completion Signal *FV0∼7 G012.0∼6 External Data Input Address Signal nc ED0∼15 G000.c E *ESP X008.6 Decoded M01 Signal DM02 F009. T.7 F 1 digit Selection Signal FSCSL F044.0∼7 EREND F060. B Function Finish (Completion) Signal w *FLWP G007.3 External Punch Start Signal EXRD G058.7 External Data Input Strobe Signal EA0∼6 G002.0∼7 External Data Input Data Signal G001.0∼7 Feedrate Override Signal 240 .0∼7 G120.2.3 Distribution End Signal DM00 F009.4.4 Decoded M30 Signal om DNCI F043.5 Decoded M02 Signal DM30 F009.1 Search End Signal .0 External Operation Function Signal nt EFIN *"ED1∼8 G005. S.2 External Read/Punch Stop Signal w EXWT G058.c ENBKY F053.6 External Reset Signal ENB F001.0∼7 Reference Position Return Deceleration Signal DEN F001.4.5 Operation by I/O device Mode DRN G046. 3 2nd/3rd Spindle Enable Signal EF F008.0 Read End Signal ESEND F060.

3 Power Cable Condition Verification Signal G075. 2 Gear Selection Input Signal G029.7 Dry Run Confirmation Signal MD10∼40 F073.0∼7 "LM1∼8 G110.0 Inhibit Key Input Signal e INCH F002.c MABSM F004.6 EDIT Mode Confirmation Signal 241 .0 All Axis Interlock Signal *IT1∼8 G130.0∼7 Software Limit External Set Signal G112.c I *IT G008.B–62445E/03 4.0∼2 Software Operation Panel Mode Output Signal MDTCH1∼8 F110.0∼7 w MCFNA.7 Rapid Traverse Override Select Signal *HROV0∼6 G096.0∼7 K KEY1∼4 G046.0∼2 GOQSM G039.0∼7 Manual Handle Feed Axis Select Signal G019.0∼7 Controlled Axis Detach Confirming Signal MEDT F003.3 MD1∼4 G043.4 Auxiliary Function Lock Confirmation Signal w MBDT1∼9 F004.0∼7 G010∼011 G100.0∼7 Handle Interrupt Axis Select Signal G042.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC SYMBOL PMC address Signal names G GRα 0 F034.2 Manual Absolute Confirmation Signal MAFL F004.0∼2 Gear Selection Output Signal GRα G028.1.0 Optional Block Skip Confirmation Signal F005. B G071.0∼7 M MA F001.0∼2 Mode Selection Signal w MDRN F002.0∼3 om HSαIA∼D G041.0 Inch Input Signal J ntINP1∼8 *JV0∼15 "JI∼J8 F104.0∼7 In–position Signal JOG Feedrate Override Signal Feed Axis Direction Signal ce G102.7 NC Ready Signal .0∼3 HROV G096. HB Output Signal from MPG HSnA∼D G018.7 Offset Write mode Input Signal H HA.0∼7 Each Axis Interlock Signal INHKY F053.0∼6 Rapid Traverse Override Signal r.3∼6 Memory Protection Key Signal L *"L1∼8 G114.0∼7 Overtravel Limit Signal nc G116.

0∼7 Each Axis Machine Lock Signal nt MH MINC F003.0∼7 Mirror Image Signal MF F007.c MRDYA.7 Automatic Operation Signal 242 .4 RMT Mode Confirmation Signal MREF F004.0∼5 Offset Number Input for Tool Compensation Measured Signal OP F000. 5 Incremental Feed Multiply Signal .1 Machine Lock Signal MLK1∼8 G108. B G070. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03 SYMBOL PMC address Signal names M MINP G058.c M00∼M31 F010∼13 M Function Binary Code Signal M200∼215 F014∼015 2nd M Function Binary Code Signal M300∼315 F016∼017 3rd M Function Binary Code Signal e MLK G044.0∼3 Signal MI1∼8 G106.7 TCHIN Mode Confirmation Signal w MV1∼8 F102.1 F003.7 w MRMT F003.0∼7 Axis Moving Signal MVD1∼8 F106.0∼3 Interlock Signal for Each axis and Direction (Mseries) G134.6 REF Mode Confirmation Signal w MSBK F004.4 2nd M Function Strobe Signal MF3 F008.0 External Data Input Start Signal "MIT1∼2 X004.0∼7 Mirror Image Confirmation Signal MP1. MP2 G019.0 H Mode Confirmation Signal INC Mode Confirmation Signal ce MJ F003.3 MDI Mode Confirmation Signal MMEM F003.7 Machine Ready Signal G074.0 M Function Finish (Completion) Signal r.3 Single Block Confirmation Signal MTCHIN F003.2∼5 Tool Compensation Measured Value Direct (Tseries) Input B Signal "MIT1∼4 G132.1 Machine Lock Confirmation Signal MMI1∼8 F108.2 J Mode Confirmation Signal MMDI F003.5 3rd M Function Strobe Signal MFIN G005.5 MEM Mode Confirmation Signal nc MMLK F004.4.4.0 M Function Strobe Signal om MF2 F008.0∼7 Axis Moving Direction Signal O OFN0∼5 G039.

7 RCHPA.0∼3 Workpiece Number Search Signal PRC G040.6 Spindle Output Switching Request Signal G075.0 Spindle Speed 12–bit Binary Code Input Signal R01O∼120 G036. B G070.c PRTSF F062.B–62445E/03 4.7 Position Coder 1/2 Select Signal om PN1∼8 G009.6 OUT0∼7 F072. B G071.3 F050.6 Position Recode Signal PRGDPL F053.0∼7 Software Operator’s Panel General Purpose Switch Signal OVC G006.2 Read/Punch Busy Signal RPALM F053. PB Power Unit Ready Signal PC2SLC G028.7 Required Machined Parts Reach Signal PSW1∼10 F070. B G071.0∼ Position Switch Signal F071.0 Rigid Tapping Signal RGSPM F065.0 Rewinding Signal 243 .3 Spindle Speed 12–bit Binary Code Output Sig- w nal RPD0 F002.0. 2 G014.7 Power Cable Condition Verification Signal e G075. B F050.3 Spindle Switch Completion Signal ce RGTAP G061.2 R RCHA.2 Output Switching Request Signal ntRCFNA. 1 Rapid Traverse Override Signal .3 Read/Punch Alarm Signal w RRW G008.0∼G037.4 Override Cancel Signal P PA.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC SYMBOL PMC address Signal names O ORCMA.1 Program Screen Display Signal r.7 Manual Rapid Traverse Signal RWD F000.6 RST F001.6 Spindle Orientation Command Signal G074.1 Reset Signal RT G019.7 Softeware Limit Release Signal ROV1.1 Rapid Traverse Operation Mode Signal w RPBSY F053.1 Spindle Rotate CCW Signal in Rigid Tapping Mode nc RGSPP F065.6 Reset & Rewind Signal RSLA.2 F046. B F046.0 Spindle Rotate CW Signal in Rigid Tapping Mode RLSOT G007.c R01I∼12I G032.

4 Spindle Reverse Direction Signal G074.c SFRA. B G071.4 SVF1∼8 G126.4 Feed Hold Lamp Signal om SF F007.5 Cycle Start Lamp Signal *SP G008. 3 G029.4 e SVC Spindle Velocity Command (Analog Voltage) Signal nt SAR *SSTP *SSTP2.1 Start Lock Signal .5 SRVA.6 Servo Unit Ready Signal SBK G046.0 Spindle Alarm Signal SPSTP G028.7 Spindle Control Selection Signal w SSIN G033.2 Cycle Start Signal STL F000. B G070. B G070.c SKIP X004.4.6 Spindle Polarity Selection Signal SGN G033.0∼7 Servo Enable Off Signal STLK G007.5 Spindle Forward Direction Signal G074.6 G027. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03 SYMBOL PMC address Signal names S SA F000.7 Skip Signal SIND G033.0 Spindle Clamp Signal SUCLP F038.2 S Function Finish (Completion) Signal r.1 Spindle Unclamp Signal 244 .1 Single Block Signal ST G007.6 Spindle Stop Confirmation Signal SCLP F038.5 Feed Hold Signal SPL F000.5 Output Voltage Polarity Signal w SRN G006.4.0 Program Restart Signal SMZ G053.4 Spindle Soft–start/Stop Cancel Signal G075.2 S Function Strobe Signal S00∼S31 F022∼025 S Function Binary Code Signal SFIN G005.5 Spindle Orientation Command SOV0∼7 G030 Spindle Speed Override Signal nc SOCNA.4 G029.6 Error Detect Signal (In–position Check) w SPAL F035. 5 Spindle Speed Arrival Signal Spindle Stop Signal 2nd/3rd Spindle Stop Signal ce SOR G029.

3 Simple Synchronous Manual 4th Axis Selec- tion Signal e T TAP F001.0 Tool Change Command Signal .6 Data Output & Operation Simultaneous Mode Signal SWS1∼3 G027.c SYNC1∼4 G138.0 Low–speed Torque Limit Signal G074.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC SYMBOL PMC address Signal names S *SCPF G028.3 T Function Strobe Signal ntT00∼T31 TFIN F026∼029 G005.B–62445E/03 4.2 Spindle Synchronous Control Signal SPSLA.7 Tool Change Reset Signal TLSKP G048.0∼3 Simple Synchronous Axis Selection Signal SUNC4J G140.3 T Function Binary Code Signal T Function Finish (Completion) Signal ce THRD F002.c TLNW F064. B G071. B G070.2 om STRD G058.3 Custom Macro Interrupt Signal 245 . B G070.0 nc TLRST G048.1 High–speed Torque Limit Signal G074.2 Spindle Selection Signal G075.1 New Tool Select Signal TLMLA.5 Tapping Mode Signal TF F007.0∼2 Spindle Switch Signal r.0∼7 Tools Group Number Signal G048.5 Spindle Clamp Completion Signal *SUCPF G028.3 Threading Mode Signal TL1∼256 G047.1 w TMRON G053.0 w TLMHA.0 General Purpose Timer ON Signal U UI0∼UI15 G054∼055 Input Signal by Custom Macro Function Signal w UO0∼131 F054∼059 Output Signal by Custom Macro Function Sig- nal UINT G053.5 Tool Skip Signal TLCH F064.4 Spindle Unclamp Completion Signal SPPHS G038.3 Spindle Synchronous Phase Control Signal SPSYC G038.5 Data Input & Operation Simultaneous Mode Signal STWD G058.

6 Work Coordinate System Shift Amount Write Mode Signal WOSET G040. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62445E/03 SYMBOL PMC address Signal names W WOSQM G039.7 Reference Position Return Mode Signal ZP1∼8 F094.0∼7 3rd Reference Position Return Completion Signal ZP41∼48 F100.2 tion Signal Automatic Tool Compensation Z Axis Reach Signal ce nc .0∼7 2nd Reference Position Return Completion r.c Signal ZP31∼38 F098.7 Work Coordinate System Shift Amount Write Input Signal X XAE X004.4.0 Automatic Tool Compensation X Axis Reach Signal Y YAE X004.1 Automatic Tool Compensation Y Axis Reach Signal om Z ZRN G043.c w w w 246 .0∼7 1st Reference Position Return Completion Signal ZP21∼28 F096.0∼7 4th Reference Position Return Completion e Signal ZRF1∼8 F102.0∼7 Floating Reference Position Return Comple- nt ZAE X004.

. . 258 Refer to the following manuals for maintenance of FANUC AC SERVO e MOTOR α series : nt 1) FANUC CONTROL MOTOR α series MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B–65165E) 2) FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series PARAMETER MANUAL ce (B–65150E) nc . . . . . . . . . . .B–62445E/03 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN . . . . . om 5. . . . . . . . . . .4 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING . . . . . DIGITAL SERVO 5 DIGITAL SERVO This chapter describes servo tuning screen required for maintenance of digital servo and adjustment of reference position. . . . . . . . 253 5. 248 5. . . . . .1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS .c 5. . 256 r. . . . .3 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD) .c w w w 247 . . . . . . . . .

8192 8192 PRM 2023 (9)POSITION PULSE NO. PRM 2047(POA1). of pulses of pulse coder: w PRM 2043(PK1V).PARA]. PRM 2053(PPMAX). om 3. SERVO PARAMETERS 2. which is used for field adjustment of machine tool.c SERVO SETTING X AXIS Y AXIS e (1)INITIAL SET BIT 00000000 00000000 PRM 2000 (2)MOTOR ID NO. PRM 2074(AALPH). INITIAL SETTING 1. Display the servo parameter setting screen by the following operation: SYSTEM key [SV. PRM 2059(EMFBAS).5. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3111 SVS #0 (SVS) 0 : Servo tuning screen is not displayed.1 This section describes how to set initial servo parameters. Set the parameter to display the servo tuning screen. 12500 12500 PRM 2024 (10)REF. 4. Turn off the power once then turn it on again. PRM 2056(EMFCMP).COUNTER 8000 8000 PRM 1821 nc (1) INITIAL SET BIT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 2000 PRMCAL DGPRM PLC01 . 47 47 PRM 2020 (3)amr nt (4)cmr (5)FEED GEAR N (6) (N/M) M (7)DIRECTION SET 00000000 2 1 125 111 00000000 2 1 125 111 PRM PRM PRM PRM PRM 2001 1820 2084 2085 2022 ce (8)VELOCITY PULSE NO. 248 . #0 (PLC01) 0 : Values of parameter 2023 and 2024 are used as they are: 1 : Values of parameter 2023 and 2024 are multiplied by 10. 1 : Initial setting of digital servo parameter is not done. Input data required for initial setting using the cursor and page key. DEGITAL SERVO B–62445E/03 5.c #3 (PRMCAL) 1 : Turns to 1 when the initial setting is done. Turn on power at the emergency stop condition.PRM 2076(WKAC) w #1 (DGPRM)l 0 : Initial setting of digital servo parameter is done. 5. The following parameters are set automatically in accordance with the no.PRM 2054(PDDP). PRM 2044(PK2V). r. w PRM 2057(PVPA). 1 : Servo tuning screen is displayed.

c (Item of ) Model 50S 60S 70S name w 4 For 200V to 230V input amplifier (for high speed motor) (A06B–xxxx–BVVV) w Format 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 number Drawing 0371 0373 0313 0514 0317 0318 0319 w number (Item of ) Model 2–0SP 1–0SP/ 0S 5S/ 10S/ 20S/ 30S/ name 3000 3000 3000 3000 Format 73 78 79 81 83 84 number Drawing 0320 0583 0381 0383 0385 0374 number (Item of ) Model 6S/ 40S/ 0T/ 5T/ 10T/ 00SP name 3000 2000 3000 3000 3000 249 . 1 For185V input amplifier (A06B–xxxx–BVVV) Format 42 54 56 57 58 59 60 number Drawing 0531 0506 0561 0562 0564 0571 0572 number om (Item of ) Model 5–0 30/ 0L 5L 6L 7L 10L name 2000 2 For 200V to 230V input amplifier (A06B–xxxx–BVVV) Format 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 r.B–62445E/03 5.c number Drawing 0532 0433 0371 0372 0313 0314 0316 number (Item of ) Model 4–0S 3–0S 2–0SP 1–0SP 0S 5S 6S e name Format 50 51 52 53 80 82 nt number Drawing number (Item of ) 0315 0505 0502 0590 0382 0384 ce Model 10S 20S/ 20S 30S 5T 10T name 1500 3 For 200V to 230V input amplifier (for large motor) (A06B–xxxx–BVVV) nc Format 39 40 41 number Drawing 0331 0332 0333 number . per axis Motor type no. that can be set are 15 to 26 and 39 to 84. DIGITAL SERVO (2) MOTOR NUMBER DGN 2020 Motor type no.

. DEGITAL SERVO B–62445E/03 5 For 185V input amplifier (for L series high–speed motor) (A06B–xxxx–BVVV) Format 68 69 70 71 72 number Drawing 0561 0562 0564 0571 0572 number (Item of ) Model 0L/ 5L/ 6L/ 7L/ 10L/ name 3000 3000 3000 3000 2250 6 For a series(A06B–xxxx–BVVV) om Format 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 number Drawing 0123 0127 0128 0142 0143 0147 0148 number (Item of ) Model α3/ α6/ α6/ α12/ α12/ α22/ α22/ r.c w w w 250 .5. 3–0S 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 other than above Set “00000000” for serial pulse coder C.c name 3000 2000 3000 2000 3000 2000 3000 Format 22 23 24 25 26 number Drawing 0152 0153 0161 0162 0163 e number (Item of ) Model α30/ α30/ αM3 αM6 αM9 nt name 2000 (3) ARBITARY AMR(for 5–0S to 3–0S) 3000 ce #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 PRM 2001 AMR7 AMR6 AMR5 AMR4 AMR4 AMR3 AMR2 AMR1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Motor model nc 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 5–0S 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 4–0S.

of feedback pulses per revolution of motor = m 1000000 For serial pulse coder B. set 250. (6) Feed gear N/M om FRM 2084 n of flexible feed gear FRM 2085 m of flexible feed gear 1 For serial pulse coder A or B. then turn it to on.000 pulses or less to parameter 2084.5 to 48 Set value=2×CMR (5) Turn off power once.B–62445E/03 5. DIGITAL SERVO (4) CMR DGN 1820 Command multiply ratio 1 When CMR is 1/2 to 1/27 Set value= 1 +100 CMR 2 When CMR is 0. r. and serial a pulse coder.c 1 rotation 8mm n=1/m=5 of motor 10mm n=1/m=4 12mm n=3/m=10 w (7) Direction of Travel 2022 Direction of motor rotation w PRM 111 : Positive (CCW) –111 : Reverse (CW) w 251 .c n No. e Examples Examples of calculation nt 1 rotation of motor 1/1000 mm 8mm n=1/m=125 10mm n=1/m=100 1/10000 mm n=2/m=25 n=1/m=10 ce 12mm n=3/m=250 n=3/m=25 2 For serial pulsecoder C n No. of feedback pulses per revolution of motor nc = m 40000 Examples of calculation 1/1000 mm .

c pulses 2 For serial pulse coder C Para Resolution 1/1000mm –me- e ter Full close Semi no.Full close Semi Full close Semi ter close close no. since the no.c 2001. Even if the system is of full closed loop PMR 2002#3=1 #4=0. of velocity pulses and position pulses 1 For serial pulse coder A or B and serial α pulse coder Para Resolution 1/1000mm Resolution 1/10000mm – me. 2000 xxxx xxx 0 xxxx xxx 1 tion setting Separate 1815 0010 0010 0010 0000 0010 0010 0010 0000 om detector Velocity 2023 8192 819 feedback pulses Position 2024 NS 12500 NS/10 1250 feedback r. High resolu. DEGITAL SERVO B–62445E/03 (8) No. set parameter . of position feedback pulses times 4. Turn off power then turn on power. w 252 .5. of poles is different. For 5–0S to 3–0S motor. close nt High resolu- tion setting Separate detector 2000 1815 0000 0010 xxxx xxx1 0000 0000 ce Velocity 2023 4000 feedback pulses Position 2024 NS/10 4000 nc feedback pulses NS is the no. w (9) Reference counter PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity(099999999) w 6.

GAIN 125 CURRENT% 10 (16) SPEED RPM 100 (17) nc SV SET SV TUN OPE 1 Function bit : PRM 2003 2 Loop gain : PRM 1825 . Parameter Setting #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3111 SVS om #0 (SVS) 0 : Servo tuning screen is not displayed. Press soft key [SV. Displaying Servo 2.2. SET PERIOD INT. Tuning Screen e SERVO TUNING 01234 N12345 (PAMAMETER) (MONITOR) (1) FUN.GAIN –1015 LOOP GAIN 2999 (14) (7) FILER 0 POS ERROR 556 (15) (8) VELOC. 17 Speed RPM : Number of motor actual rotation 253 .c 5. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [SV. r.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN 5.c 3 Tuning start : (Used by automatic servo tuning function) 4 Set period : (Used by automatic servo tuning function) w 5 Integral gain : PRM 2043 6 Proportional gain : PRM 2044 w 7 Filter : PRM 2067 (PRM 2021)+256 8 Velocity gain Set value= 256 ×100 9 Alarm 1 : DGN 200 (Details of alarm 400 and 414) w 10 Alarm 2 : DGN 201 (Details of disconnection alarm. 1 : Servo tuning screen is displayed. overload) 11 Alarm 3 : DGN 202 (Details of alarm 319) 12 Alarm 4 : DGN 203 (Details of alarm 319) 13 Alarm 5 : DGN 204 (Details of alarm 414) 14 Loop gain : Actual loop gain 15 Position error : Actual position error(DGN 300) 16 Current(%) : Indicate current with % to the rated value.GAIN 3000 0 50 113 ALARM 2 ALARM 3 ALARM 4 ALARM 5 00000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 (10) (11) (12) (13) ce (6) PROP.2 1. DIGITAL SERVO 5.BIT 00000000 ALARM 1 00000000 (9) nt (2) (3) (4) (5) LOOP GAIN TURNING SET.1 Set a parameter to display the servo tuning screen.B–62445E/03 5. PARA] in this order.2.TUN] to select the servo tuning screen.

DEGITAL SERVO B–62445E/03 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Alarm1 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA DGN (200) : #7 (OVL) : Overload alarm #6 (LV) : Insufficient voltage alarm #5 (OVC) : Overcurrent alarm #4 (HCA) : Abnormal current alarm om #3 (HVA) : Excessive voltage alarm #2 (DCA) : Discharge alarm #1 (FBA) : Disconnection alarm #0 (OFA) : Overflow alarm r. #0 (SPH) : Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is faulty. Internal block has stopped. Counting the feedback signal is in error. If the RCA bit is set to 1 when both the FBA bit (bit 1 of alarm 1) and w ALD bit of alarm 2 are set to 1 and the EXP bit of alarm 2 (internal hardware disconnection) is set to 1.c #6 (CSA) : Hardware of serial pulse coder is abnormal. w #3 (RCA) : Serial pulse coder is faulty. Replace batteries and set the reference position. 0 — — — Amplifier overheat load alarm 1 — — — Motor overheat nt Discon. 254 . a count miss alarm (CMAL) occurs in the α pulse coder.c #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Alarm2 ALD EXP DGN ) ⇓ e Over. #2 (BZA) : Battery voltage becomes 0. Counting is in error.1 nection alarm 1 — — — — 0 1 Built–in pulse coder disconnec- tion (Hardware) Separate type pulse coder dis- ce connection (Hardware) 0 — — 0 Pulse coder disconnection (soft- ware) nc #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Alarm3 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH DGN (202) : . Counting the feedback signal is in error. #5 (BLA) : Battery voltage is in low (warning). #1 (CKA) : Serial pulse coder is faulty.5. w #4 (PHA) : Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is abnormal.

c w w w 255 . Transmitted data is in error. DIGITAL SERVO #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Alarm4 DTE CRC STB DGN (203) : #7 (DTE) : Communication error of serial pulse coder. om #5 (STB) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.c Alarm3 OFS MCC LDM PMS DGN (204) : #6 (OFS) : A/D conversion of current value of digital servo is abnormal. #6 (CRC) : Communication error of serial pulse coder. There is no response. #3 (PMS) : : ntNo. e #5 (MCC) : Contacts of electro–magnetic contactor of servo amplifier is blown #4 (LDM) : LED of serial pulse coder is abnormal. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 r. Transmitted data is in error. ce nc . of feedback pulses are in error because serial pulse coder C or feedback cable is faulty.B–62445E/03 5.

c (PRM1420α) FL rate (PRM1425 α ) Time e Rapid traverse acc. PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity [P] No.5.3.3 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD) 5./dec.1 General om Speed Rapid traverse r.c 10000P + Error count. 256 . of feedback pulses or its division by an integer is set. DEGITAL SERVO B–62445E/03 5. time constant (PRM1620 α ) *DECα nt ce PCZ Grid nc Grid shift amount Reference counter capacity (PRM1850) (PRM1821) 10mm/rev . FFG PC w 10000P/rev (Flex- Counter capacity ible feed gear) 10000p w D Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 PRM 1002 DLZ #1(DLZ)l 0 : Reference position return method is normal (dog). Proportion Speed M CMR f gain Command er loop – (Serial) w 4 Refere GRID count. 1 : Dogless reference position setting is used.

c To manually change the value of the APZ bit from 0 to 1 without first returning to the reference position when using serial pulse coder α .0001mm. e Turn the power off then on again. . DIGITAL SERVO PRM 1850 Grid shift amount per axis [P] When the resolution is 0. then change the APZ bit setting from 0 to 1. follow this procedure: Back up the data with the battery and give the motor one or more turns.B–62445E/03 5. nt #1(OPT) 0 : Position detection is performed by the pulse coder built in the motor. a quotient of the distance between the reference marks divided by an interfer may be used as a reference counter capacity: w Example w (1µ m) 300mm ⇒ reference counter 30000 w 20000 15000 10000 etc 257 .c When plural reference marks are on a linear scale. #4(APZ) Zero position of absolute pulse coder is : 0 : Not established 1 : Established (Turns to 1 after establishment) r. the number of feedback pulses per motor revolution is set to the reference counter capacity. set the value in the unit ten times the detection unit. ce  Separate Type Pulse Coder or Linear Scale is Used nc PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity per axis [P] Normally. 1 : Separate type pulse coder or linear scale is used. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 PRM 1815 APC APZ OPT #5(APC) 0 : Position detector is other than absolute pulse coder. om 1 : Position detector is absolute pulse coder.

5. DEGITAL SERVO B–62445E/03 5. After the reference position has been set. (This position is set as the reference position). perform this setting.....c Operation 1 Move the tool near the reference position using a manual operation... then stops....... w 258 . select the reference position w return mode(SRN signal is 1) and turn on an axis–and–direction– select signal. 2 Select the reference position return mode or switch...4. then the tool returns to the reference position. When the absolute detector is replaced or absolute position is lost.. REFERENCE When the absolute position detector is used...4.. and the w machine moves to the next grid....2 . the reference position once POSITION SETTING set remains also during power off.. ce ZP α nc 5. 3 Press a button for an axis–and–direction–select–signal + or –. this function enables the tool to return the reference position that is set by DOGLESS MTB.c FL rate (PRM 1425) Time JOG e ZRN +Jα GRID nt ...1 om General Speed Reference position return r.4 When there are no dog nor limit switch for reference position return.. 5.

B–62445E/03 5.c w w w 259 .c After ZRN signal becomes 1. 1 : Reference position return and backlash initial direction is –. DIGITAL SERVO 5. manual feed direction is always the direction set by this parameter irrespective of an axis selection signal. e nt ce nc .3 Associated Parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 PRM 1002 DLZ #1(DLZ) 0 : Dog is used for reference position return l 1 : Dogless reference position setting om #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 PRM 1006 ZMI #5(ZMI) 0 : Reference position return and backlash initial direction is +.4. r.

. .c 1) FANUC CONTROL MOTOR α series MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B–65165E) 2) FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series PARAMETER MANUAL w (B–65160E) w w 260 . . . . 269 6. . .4 SPINDLE SETTING AND TUNING SCREEN . . . . . AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62445E/03 6 AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) This chapter describes the parameter tuning screen of serial interface spindle amplifier. 261 6. . . . .2 TABLE OF TEST POINTS . . . . . . . . .c (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . 263 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . om 6. .3 CONFIRMING POWER SUPPLY r. . . . . . . . the following specification number is printed on upper part of the spindle unit ce A06B–6063–Hxxx or A06B–6064–Hxxx or A06B–6065–Hxxx nc (xxx is any) Refer to the following manuals for maintenance of FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series : . . . . . . . . . .5 AUTOMATIC SETTING OF STANDARD e PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . .1 GENERAL OF SPINDLE CONTROL (SERIAL* INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . 266 6. . . . . . . . . .6. . . 277 nt On the serial interface spindle amplifier. . . . . . . . .

SST. LDT1.c Motor speed SOVx( Spindle override) SF.M19 FIN *SSTP(Spindle stop) r. .B–62445E/03 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) 6.M04. SDT.MRDY.ORCM etc. SAR. Interface w function Optical cable w Serial spindle amplifier Interface function Spindle Operator’s motor panel PC Load meter LM Speed meter Spindle SM 261 .1 GENERAL OF SPINDLE CONTROL (SERIAL* INTERFACE) S instruction M instruction NC PMC om M03.c SFR.1=–) 0 1 SSIN *ESP.6) SGN(0=+. w LDT2 ORAR. ALM etc.GR10. R01IR12I 3706#5) 0 1 SIND Output polarity nc (PRM 3706#7. 3732.GR30 (For milling machine) GR1.GR20.GR2 (For lathe) e S SOR( Orientation) (PRM 37353752) nt 0 1 R010R120 ce Orientation speed (PRM 3705#1.M05.SRV.

1.2 Method B of Gear Output Motor speed change for Machining 4095 Max Center(PRM 3705#2=1) PRM 3736 e Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 nt PRM 3735 ce 0 S code 0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 6.c 6.1.3 nc For Lathe Output Motor speed 4095 Max Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 .1. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62445E/03 6.6.1 Method A of Gear Output Motor speed Change for Machining 4095 Max Center Gear 2 PRM 3736 Gear 3 Gear 1 om PRM 3735 0 0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 S code r.c Gear 4 w 0 S code w 0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 PRM 3744 w 262 .

The low level of this signal indicates that the ken wire is broken.c PBAS Signal with the amplitude 10 90 delay for PA in a clockwise direc- times that of PB tion.5V om PB Pulse–generator phase B 90° delay for PA in a CW rotation Vpp=0.5V RA Phase–A reference voltage DC +2.6V to 5.5V0.2V PAAS Signal with the amplitude 10 90° advance for PB in a clockwise direc- times that of PA tion.2V RB Phase–B reference voltage DC +2.2 TABLE OF TEST POINTS 6.5V r.B–62445E/03 6.1 Printed Circuit Board Name Signal Remarks (A16B–2201–0440) PA Pulse–generator phase A 90°advance for PB in a CW rotation Vpp=0.Vp–p=3.360.c CLK1 Clock signal 8MHz. .Vp–p=3.2. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) 6.6 to 0. 50% duty VDC DC link voltage signal Voltage that is 1/100 of the DC link voltage SDC Control power DC link voltage Voltage that is 1/100 of the DC voltage of the w signal input power +24V +24V DC voltage +20V to +26V +15V +15V DC voltage +15V ±4% w +5V +5V DC voltage +5V±% –15V –15V DC voltage –15V±4% w 0V 263 .360.0V PAA A phase pulse waveform Duty 50% (ON/ OFF ratio) e PBA B phase pulse waveform Duty 50% (ON/ OFF ratio) *ITP1 ITP pulse Synchronous signal from the CNC nt TR MSA Serial data transmission sig- nal Magnetic sensor output MSA signal The high level of this signal indicates that se- rial data is being transmitted from the CNC One signal per rotation ce LSA Magnetic sensor output One signal per rotation LAS signal *LS LSA pulse signal One signal per rotation PAE2 Position–coder phase A Duty 50% (ON/ OFF ratio) nc PBE2 Posiiton–coder phase B Duty 50% (ON/ OFF ratio) PSE2 Position–coder phase Z 1 pulse/rotation *PELS Position coder cable is bro.5V0.

3A/V Model 15S 41.3A/V Model 40S 104.9A/V Model small 6S.5A/V Model 60HV 94.6S12S 33.40HV 50.c nt ce nc .7A/V Model 26S 83.7A/V Model 15S22S 66.c w w w 264 .6.7A/V om e r.2A/V Model 30HV.3A/V IV V–phase current detection Model Small 30S 111. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62445E/03 Name Signal Remarks IU U–phase current detection signal Amplifier Current Model 1S3S 21.1A/V signal Model 30S 83.

c PAA 0V 0V PBA Signal formed e by PA/PB Peak IU nt 0V Current feed- back signal of each phase ce IV Peak value is 0V proportional to current value 125ns nc +4V Clock CLK1 8MHz 0V . AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) 6.2.2 Signal Waveform Remarks At Test Points Check terminal Waveform PB PA Pulse generator output PA 0.c w w w 265 .B–62445E/03 6.36 +2.5V r.5 Phase differ- ence between V PA and PB is 0V 90° om RA 2.5V"0.5V PB X0.2V RB Nominal 0V voltage +4X+4.

3.6.S. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62445E/03 6.2 nt ce Test Points  A20B–1003–0550 nc CN10 Ę Ę Ę +B –B 0B .3.T.1 Confirm AC power voltage and DC current on spindle control circuit PCB Power Supply as follows: om AC power supply Check terminals R.3 CONFIRMING POWER SUPPLY (SERIAL INTERFACE) 6.c +15V Across +15V to 0V +15V"4% +5V Across +5V to 0V +5V"2% –15V Across –15V to 0V –15V"4% e 6.G DC voltage Volt Test points Rated value on spindle control circuit +24V Across +24V to 0V +20X+26V PCB r.c Ę 0V C N w 6 Ę ST w C N w 5 +24V Ę Ę 0V +5V Ę Ę 0V +15V Ę Ę–15V 0V Ę C N 4 CN11A CN11B CN2 TB 266 .

B–62445E/03 6.c w w w 267 . AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)  A20B–1003–0920 CN10 Ę Ę Ę +B –B 0B Ę 0V C N 6 om C N 5 +24V Ę r.c Ę 0V +5V Ę +15V Ę Ę 0V Ę –15V C 0V Ę Ę 0V N e 4 nt CN13 CN11A CN11B CN2 TB ce nc .

AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62445E/03  A16B–2201–0010 A16B–2201–0440 0V +24V +15V –15V +5V Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Display part Setting switch ROM ST2 om CN10 ST1 r.c CNA/TOP w CN13 CN11A CN11B CN2/BOTTOM w w 268 .c C e N 12 S2 S3 nt ce C N TB 14 nc .6.

Press soft key [SP–PRM] and the spindle tuning screen is displayed.B–62445E/03 6.2 Spindle Setting Screen nc SPINDLE SETTING (1)GEAR SELECT : 1 (2)SPINDLE : S11 (PARAMETER) . l 1 : Spindle tuning screen is displayed. Confirm the parameters Display Method #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3111 SPS om #1 (SPS) 0 : Spindle tunign screen is not displayed. w Display CTH1 CTH2 1 0 0 2 0 1 3 1 0 4 1 1 D Spindle Shows spindle concerned S11: Main spindle amp.4.4 SPINDLE SETTING AND TUNING SCREEN 6. of 2nd spindle 269 .SET] : Spindle setting screen nt 2 [SP. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) 6. 2. 4. 1 [SP. of 2nd spindle S22 : Sub spindle amp.4.MON] : Spindle monitor screen ce 6. of 1st spindle S12 : Sub spindle amp.c 3. 5. Press soft key .TUN] : Spindle tuning screen 3 [SP. Press SYSTEM key. The following screens are available and they can be selected by soft e key.1 1.c (3)GEAR RATIO 50 (4)MAX SPINDLE SPEED 3000 (5)MAX MOTOR SPEED 6000 (6)MAX C AXIS SPEED 100 w w D Gear select Shows gear selected on the machine side. of 1st spindle S21 : Main spindle amp. r.

C axis speed 4021 None 4021 None 6. motor speed 4020 4196 4020 4196 e Max.c MOTOR VOLT 30 POS ERR S2 103 TIME CONST 100 SYN.GAIN 50 SPINDLE SPEED 150 LOOP GAIN 3000 POS ERR S1 100 .c Max.ERR 3 REF. spindle rpm (Gear1) 3741 3741 Max.4.GAIN 20 MOTOR SPEED 100 INT. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62445E/03  Parameter S11:1st Main S12:1st Sub S21:2nd Main S22:2nd Sub Gear ratio(HIGH) 4056 4056 4216 4216 Gear ratio(MIDIUM HIGH) 4057 4057 Gear ratio(MIDIUM LOW) 4058 4058 4217 4217 Gear ratio(LOW) 4059 4059 om Max.3 nt ce Spindle Tuning Screen SPINDLE TUNING OPERATION : SPEED CONTROL GEAR SELECT : 1 nc SPINDLE : S11 (PARAMETER) (MONITOR) PROP. spindle rpm (Gear3) 3743 3743 r. spindle rpm (Gear2) 3742 3742 Max. SHIFT 2046 w  Operation mode 1 : Speed control (normal mode) w 2 : Spindle Orientation 3 : Synchronization control w 4 : Rigid tapping 5 : Spindle contouring control (Cs axis control) 6 : Spindle positioning control 270 .6. spindle rpm (Gear4) 3744 3744 Max.

posi- era. Orient Syn. – f – – – – r.c Position deviation S2 – – – – – Position deviation Z – – – f – – Synchronous deviation – – f f – – f w Feed rate – – – – – Spindle data 1) Motor speed [rpm] + Max. posi- era. con. con. ping con. Sp. Orient Syn. Motor rpm.5 for correspondence between operation mode and e parameters.(*) w 16383 (*) PRM 4020: Main Sp.c ORAR gain (%) – f – – – – Acc. 271 . trol trol tion- tion ing con- trol nc Motor speed f f f f f f Spindle speed f f f f f – Position deviation S1 – f f f f f f . AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) D Display of parameter Display of parameter contents changes depending on operation mode. tap. Nor. axis le op. tap. ping con. trol trol tion- tion ing con- trol Proportional gain f f f f f f Integral gain f f f f f